From 075c6d4e24272e6c590b6f3d2ed9c8f36d04d5ff Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: JT Smith Date: Wed, 2 Jul 2003 03:14:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH] preparing for 5.5.0 dev cycle --- docs/previousVersion.sql | 295 ++++++++++++++++++++------ docs/upgrades/upgrade_5.4.1-5.5.0.sql | 2 + lib/WebGUI.pm | 2 +- 3 files changed, 233 insertions(+), 66 deletions(-) create mode 100644 docs/upgrades/upgrade_5.4.1-5.5.0.sql diff --git a/docs/previousVersion.sql b/docs/previousVersion.sql index 705fb1e6f..8d0134554 100644 --- a/docs/previousVersion.sql +++ b/docs/previousVersion.sql @@ -2572,7 +2572,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (119,'WebGUI',2,'Authentifizierungsmethode (Sta INSERT INTO international VALUES (5,'Auth/LDAP',2,'LDAP URL (Standard)',1040644184,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (117,'WebGUI',2,'Benutzereinstellungen bearbeiten',1045243017,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (118,'WebGUI',2,'anonyme Registrierung',1041607629,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (116,'WebGUI',2,'Rechte an alle nachfolgenden Seiten weitergeben.',1040650415,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (116,'WebGUI',2,'Rechte an alle nachfolgenden Seiten und Wobjects weitergeben.',1056542136,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (108,'WebGUI',2,'Besitzer',1040650300,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (107,'WebGUI',2,'Rechte',1040650272,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (105,'WebGUI',2,'Layout',1048242843,NULL); @@ -4956,7 +4956,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (5,'Auth/LDAP',8,'LDAP URL (default)',104577808 INSERT INTO international VALUES (118,'WebGUI',8,'Registrazione Anonima',1045915239,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (119,'WebGUI',8,'Authentication Method (default)',1045915276,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (117,'WebGUI',8,'Modifica settaggi Utente',1045784387,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (116,'WebGUI',8,'Seleziona \"Si\" per dare a tutte le sottopagine gli stessi privilegi di questa.',1031911949,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (116,'WebGUI',8,'Seleziona \"Si\" per dare a tutte le sottopagine e ai Wobjects gli stessi privilegi di questa.',1056804147,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (108,'WebGUI',8,'Proprietario',1045784369,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (107,'WebGUI',8,'Privilegi',1045784187,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (106,'WebGUI',8,'Seleziona \"Si\" per dare a tutte le sottopagine lo stesso stile di questa.',1045779457,NULL); @@ -5401,7 +5401,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (49,'Product',1,'Product Benefit, Add/Edit',103 INSERT INTO international VALUES (697,'WebGUI',1,'Karma, Using',1031514049,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (698,'WebGUI',1,'Karma is a method of tracking the activity of your users, and potentially rewarding or punishing them for their level of activity. Once karma has been enabled, you\'ll notice that the menus of many things in WebGUI change to reflect karma.\r\n

\r\n\r\nYou can track whether users are logging in, and how much they contribute to your site. And you can allow them access to additional features by the level of their karma.\r\n

\r\n\r\nYou can find out more about karma in Ruling WebGUI.',1031514049,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (5,'WobjectProxy',1,'Wobject Proxy, Add/Edit',1031514049,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (6,'WobjectProxy',1,'With the Wobject Proxy you can mirror a wobject from another page to any other page. This is useful if you want to reuse the same content in multiple sections of your site.\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\nWobject To Proxy
\r\nSelect the wobject from your system that you\'d like to proxy. The select box takes the format of \"Page Title / Wobject Name (Wobject Id) so that you can quickly and accurately find the wobject you\'re looking for.\r\n

\r\n\r\n',1031514049,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (6,'WobjectProxy',1,'With the Wobject Proxy (aka Shortcut) you can mirror a wobject from another page to any other page. This is useful if you want to reuse the same content in multiple sections of your site.\r\n

\r\n\r\nNOTE: The wobject proxy is not available through the Add Content menu, but instead through the shortcut icon on each wobject\'s toolbar.\r\n

\r\n\r\nWobject To Proxy
\r\nProvides a link to the orignal wobject being proxied.\r\n

\r\n\r\nOverride title?
\r\nSet to \"yes\" to use the title of the wobject proxy instead of the original title of the wobject.\r\n

\r\n\r\nOverride description?
\r\nSet to \"yes\" to use the description of the wobject proxy instead of the original description of the wobject.\r\n

\r\n\r\nOverride display title?
\r\nSet to \"yes\" to use the display title setting of the wobject proxy instead of the original display title setting of the wobject.\r\n

\r\n\r\nOverride template?
\r\nSet to \"yes\" to use the template of the wobject proxy instead of the original template of the wobject.\r\n

\r\n',1057091098,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (38,'Product',1,'Product, Add/Edit',1038889846,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (39,'Product',1,'WebGUI has a product management system built in to enable you to publish your products and services to your site quickly and easily.\r\n

\r\n\r\nTemplate
\r\nSelect a layout for this product.\r\n

\r\n\r\nPrice
\r\nThe price of this product. You may optionally enter text like \"call for pricing\" if you wish, or you may leave it blank.\r\n

\r\n\r\nProduct Number
\r\nThe product number, SKU, ISBN, or other identifier for this product.\r\n

\r\n\r\nProduct Image 1
\r\nAn image of this product.\r\n

\r\n\r\nProduct Image 2
\r\nAn image of this product.\r\n

\r\n\r\nProduct Image 3
\r\nAn image of this product.\r\n

\r\n\r\nBrochure
\r\nThe brochure for this product.\r\n

\r\n\r\nManual
\r\nThe product, user, or service manual for this product.\r\n

\r\n\r\nWarranty
\r\nThe warranty for this product.\r\n

\r\n',1038889846,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (40,'Product',1,'Product Feature, Add/Edit',1031514049,NULL); @@ -7152,7 +7152,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (2,'WebGUI',11,' INSERT INTO international VALUES (1,'WebGUI',11,'ÅÖÇÝÉ ãÍÊæì..',1031514049,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (886,'WebGUI',1,'Hide from navigation?',1044727952,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (887,'WebGUI',1,'Midas (Mozilla 1.3+)',1047342950,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (634,'WebGUI',2,'Standard Startseite
Einige kleinere Seiten haben keine Startseite \r\n(Eingangsseite), stattdessen benutzen sie eine der internen Seiten wie "Ãœber \r\nuns" oder "Informationen über die Firma". Aus diesem Grund können \r\nSie eine beliebige Seite als Startseite auswählen. Zu dieser Startseite gelangt \r\nman, wenn man die URL wie http://www.mywebguisite.com \r\naufruft oder durch einen Klick auf den Home-Link, generiert durch das ^H; Makro. \r\n

"Nicht gefunden" Seite
Sollte eine Seite, die ein Besucher \r\naufrufen möchte, nicht vorhanden sein, kann er zur Homepage oder zu einer Fehlerseite \r\nweitergeleitet werden. Sie entscheiden, welcher Weg besser für ihre Besucher \r\nist...

Dokument Typ Beschreibung
Heutzutage ist es sehr wichtig, \r\neine grosse Anzahl von Browsern zu unterstützen, inklusive Robotern von Suchmaschinen. \r\nEinige dieser Browser möchten wissen, welcher Art Content ihnen angeboten wird. \r\nMit dem \'Doctype Tag\' können Sie dies angeben. Standardmässig generiert WebGUI \r\n HTML 4.0 konformen Inhalt.

Favicon
Ein Icon, dass in den Favoriten \r\ndes Internetexplorers angezeigt wird. Mehr Infos zu Favicons hier klicken. \r\n

Site Icon
Ein Icon, das in der URL-Leiste der meisten modernen \r\nBrowser erscheint. Es kann auch in der Bookmark Liste des Browsers erscheinen. \r\nDie Grafik muss eine Grösse von \r\n16x16 Pixels haben. \r\n

Bearbeitungszeitpunkt zu Beiträgen hinzufügen?
Gewöhnlich \r\nwird der Zeitpunkt, an dem ein Beitrag bearbeitet wurde, als so genannter Timestamp \r\nhinzugefügt, damit man später nachverfolgen kann, wann der Beitrag verfasst \r\nwurde. Diese Funktion wird natürlich nicht für alle Seiten benötigt, daher können \r\nSie den Timestamp dort deaktivieren.

\r\n

HTML filtern
Bei öffentlichen \r\nSeiten, auf denen ein Besucher die Möglichkeit hat, z. B. Beiträge in einem \r\nDiskussionsforum zu verfassen, ist es oft notwendig, deren Content zu filtern, \r\num z. B. das Ausführen böswilligen Codes zu verhindern. Und dies kann unter \r\nbesonderen Umständen zu Sicherheitsproblemen führen. Hier können Sie daher die \r\nStufe der Filterung (z.B. nur Javascript entfernen) einstellen

Maximale \r\nDateigrösse für Anhänge
Die maximale Grösse in KB der Anhänge.

Maximale \r\nGrösse einer Grafik
Falls Bilder, die hochgeladen wurden, grösser als \r\ndiese maximale Grösse einer Grafik sind, wird diese entsprechend dieser Grösseneinstellungen \r\numgewandelt. Die Angabe erfolgt in Pixel und gibtdie längste Seite der Grafik \r\nan.

Thumbnail Grösse
Hier können Sie die Grösse der Vorschaubilder \r\n(Thumbnails) angeben, die automatisch beim Hochladen von Grafiken erstellt werden. \r\nDie Grösse wird in Pixel angegeben.

Schnipsel Vorschau Länge
Wieviel \r\nZeichen eines Schnipsels werden im Uploadmanager angezeigt? Wie gesagt, damit \r\nist nur die Anzeige in der "Schnipselübersicht" gemeint; der Code \r\nselbst wird nicht beschränkt

Reihen des Textbereichs (mehrzeilige \r\nTextbox)
Hier können Sie angeben, wie viel Reihen pro Textbereich. Dies \r\ngilt dann für alleTextbereiche innerhalb der Seite - auch diejenigen, \r\ndie angezeigt werden, wenn Sie eine Seite bearbeiten.

Spalten des Textbereichs
Analog \r\nzu den Reihen der Textbereiche können Sie auch die Anzahl der Spalten angeben. \r\n

Grösse der Textbox
Hiermit können Sie angeben, wie gross die Textboxen \r\nin WebGUI sein sollen. Ein Wert von 20 z.B. erzeugt eine Textbox, die 20 Zeichen \r\nbreit ist.

Seiten Cache Timeout
Der Zeitraum, in dem die Seiten für registrierte \r\nBenutzer gecachet (zwischengespeichert) werden sollen.

Seiten Cache Timeout (Besucher)
Der \r\nZeitraumt, in dem die Seiten für Besucher gecachet werden sollen. \r\n

Beachte: Seiten Caching ist nur verfügbar, wenn der Administrator \r\ndas Cache::FileCache Perl Modul auf dem Webserver installiert/aktiviert hat. \r\nCaching (Zwischenspeichern) von Seiten kann die Performance Ihrer Website um \r\nmehr als 1000 % beschleunigen, da Seiten in einem temporären Verzeichnis zwischengespeichert \r\nwerden und nicht bei jedem Aufruf neu generiert werden müssen.

',1055250446,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (634,'WebGUI',2,'Standard Startseite
Einige kleinere Seiten haben keine Startseite \r\n(Eingangsseite), stattdessen benutzen sie eine der internen Seiten wie "Ãœber \r\nuns" oder "Informationen über die Firma". Aus diesem Grund können \r\nSie eine beliebige Seite als Startseite auswählen. Zu dieser Startseite gelangt \r\nman, wenn man die URL wie http://www.mywebguisite.com \r\naufruft oder durch einen Klick auf den Home-Link, generiert durch das ^H; Makro. \r\n

"Nicht gefunden" Seite
Sollte eine Seite, die ein Besucher \r\naufrufen möchte, nicht vorhanden sein, kann er zur Homepage oder zu einer Fehlerseite \r\nweitergeleitet werden. Sie entscheiden, welcher Weg besser für ihre Besucher \r\nist...

Dokument Typ Beschreibung
Heutzutage ist es sehr wichtig, \r\neine grosse Anzahl von Browsern zu unterstützen, inklusive Robotern von Suchmaschinen. \r\nEinige dieser Browser möchten wissen, welcher Art Content ihnen angeboten wird. \r\nMit dem \'Doctype Tag\' können Sie dies angeben. Standardmässig generiert WebGUI \r\n HTML 4.0 konformen Inhalt.

Favicon
Ein Icon, dass in den Favoriten \r\ndes Internetexplorers angezeigt wird. Mehr Infos zu Favicons hier klicken. \r\n

Site Icon
Ein Icon, das in der URL-Leiste der meisten modernen \r\nBrowser erscheint. Es kann auch in der Bookmark Liste des Browsers erscheinen. \r\nDie Grafik muss eine Grösse von \r\n16x16 Pixels haben. \r\n

Bearbeitungszeitpunkt zu Beiträgen hinzufügen?
Gewöhnlich \r\nwird der Zeitpunkt, an dem ein Beitrag bearbeitet wurde, als so genannter Timestamp \r\nhinzugefügt, damit man später nachverfolgen kann, wann der Beitrag verfasst \r\nwurde. Diese Funktion wird natürlich nicht für alle Seiten benötigt, daher können \r\nSie den Timestamp dort deaktivieren.

\r\n

HTML filtern
Bei öffentlichen \r\nSeiten, auf denen ein Besucher die Möglichkeit hat, z. B. Beiträge in einem \r\nDiskussionsforum zu verfassen, ist es oft notwendig, deren Content zu filtern, \r\num z. B. das Ausführen böswilligen Codes zu verhindern. Und dies kann unter \r\nbesonderen Umständen zu Sicherheitsproblemen führen. Hier können Sie daher die \r\nStufe der Filterung (z.B. nur Javascript entfernen) einstellen

Maximale \r\nDateigrösse für Anhänge
Die maximale Grösse in KB der Anhänge.

Maximale \r\nGrösse einer Grafik
Falls Bilder, die hochgeladen wurden, grösser als \r\ndiese maximale Grösse einer Grafik sind, wird diese entsprechend dieser Grösseneinstellungen \r\numgewandelt. Die Angabe erfolgt in Pixel und gibtdie längste Seite der Grafik \r\nan.

Thumbnail Grösse
Hier können Sie die Grösse der Vorschaubilder \r\n(Thumbnails) angeben, die automatisch beim Hochladen von Grafiken erstellt werden. \r\nDie Grösse wird in Pixel angegeben.

Schnipsel Vorschau Länge
Wieviel \r\nZeichen eines Schnipsels werden im Uploadmanager angezeigt? Wie gesagt, damit \r\nist nur die Anzeige in der "Schnipselübersicht" gemeint; der Code \r\nselbst wird nicht beschränkt

Reihen des Textbereichs (mehrzeilige \r\nTextbox)
Hier können Sie angeben, wie viel Reihen pro Textbereich. Dies \r\ngilt dann für alleTextbereiche innerhalb der Seite - auch diejenigen, \r\ndie angezeigt werden, wenn Sie eine Seite bearbeiten.

Spalten des Textbereichs
Analog \r\nzu den Reihen der Textbereiche können Sie auch die Anzahl der Spalten angeben. \r\n

Grösse der Textbox
Hiermit können Sie angeben, wie gross die Textboxen \r\nin WebGUI sein sollen. Ein Wert von 20 z.B. erzeugt eine Textbox, die 20 Zeichen \r\nbreit ist.

Wobject \r\nBerechtigungen aktivieren
Wählen Sie "Ja" um die Berechtigungsebene \r\nbei den Wobjects zu aktivieren. Standardmässig übernehmen die Wobjects die Berechtigungen \r\nder Seite.

',1056837891,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (61,'SyndicatedContent',11,'ÅÖÇÝÉ/ÊÍÑíÑ ãÍÊæì ÇáÑÇÈØÉ',1031514049,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (4,'SyndicatedContent',11,'ÊÍÑíÑ ãÍÊæì ÇáÑÇÈØÉ',1031514049,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (2,'SyndicatedContent',11,'ãÍÊæì ÇáÑÇÈØÉ (ÇáäÞÇÈÉ)',1031514049,NULL); @@ -10110,7 +10110,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (610,'WebGUI',2,'F INSERT INTO international VALUES (607,'WebGUI',2,'Anonyme Registrierung
Möchten Sie, dass sich die Besucher Ihrer Seite \r\nselbst registrieren können?

Beim Registrieren ausführen
Was \r\nhier Sie hier eintragen, wird jedesmal ausgeführt, wenn sich ein Benutzer anonym \r\nregistriert. \r\n\r\n

Karma aktivieren?
Soll Karma aktiviert werden? \r\n

Karma pro Login
Der Karmawert, den der Benutzer erhält, wenn er \r\nsich anmeldet. Dies wirkt nur, wenn Karma aktiviert ist. \r\n

Sitzungs Zeitüberschreitung (Timeout)
Die Zeit, die eine Benutzer-Sitzung \r\naktiv ist, bevor er sich wieder neu einloggen muss. Jedesmal, wenn der Benutzer \r\neine neue Seite anschaut, wird dieses Timeout wieder zurückgesetzt. Wenn Sie also z. b. das Timeout auf 8 Stunden setzen, muss sich \r\nein Benutzer wieder neu einloggen. \r\n

Benutzern erlauben, ihren Account zu deaktivieren?
Möchten Sie \r\nIhren Benutzern die Möglichkeit bieten, ihren Account ohne Ihr Zutun selbst \r\ndeaktivieren zu können

Authentifizierungsmethode (standard)
Welche Authentifizierungsmethode soll \r\nstandardmässig für neue Accounts verwendet werden? Die beiden möglichen Methoden sind WebGUI und LDAP. WebGUI Authentifizierung \r\nbedeutet, dass sich die Authentifizierung anhand des Benutzernamens und des \r\nPassworts, die in der Datenbank hinterlegt sind, richtet. Bei der LDAP-Methode \r\nerfolgt die Authentifizierung über einen externen LDAP \r\nserver.

Beachte: Diese Einstellungen können auf Benutzerebene \r\ngesondert vorgenommen werden.

\r\n

Beachte ausserdem: Abhängig davon, welche Authentifizierungsmodule \r\nin Ihrem System installiert sind, erhalten Sie eine Auswahl an möglichen Optionen. \r\nNachfolgend die Optionen für die beiden standardmässig installierten Authentifizierungsmethoden:\r\n

WebGUI Authentifizierungs Optionen

\r\nBegrüssungmeldung senden?
Möchten Sie, dass WebGUI automatisch eine \r\nBegrüssungsmeldung verschickt, wenn sich jemand für Ihre Seite registriert?

Beachte: Zusätzlich \r\nzu dem Text, den Sie angeben können, werden die Zugangsdaten der Meldung hinzugefügt \r\n

Begrüssungsmeldung
Geben Sie hier den Text ein, den Sie einem \r\nBenutzer nach erfolgter Registrierungs senden möchten.

Passwort wiederherstellen \r\nMeldung
Geben Sie hier den Text ein, der dem Benutzer gesendet wird, \r\nwenn er sein Passwort wiederherstellen lässt.

\r\n

LDAP Authentifizierungs Optionen

\r\n

LDAP URL (Standard)
Die Standard-URL zum LDAP Server. Die \r\n LDAP URL hat folgendes Format: \r\nldap://[server]:[port]/[base DN]. Beispiel: \r\nldap://ldap.mycompany.com:389/o=MyCompany.

LDAP Identität
Die \r\nLDAP Identität die eindeutige Bezeichner im LDAP Server, die den Benutzer identifiziert. Oft \r\nenthält dieses Feld den Kurznamen, der sich aus dem ersten Buchstaben \r\ndes Vornamens und dem Nachnamen zusammensetzt. Beispiel: jdoe

LDAP Identitäts Name
Bezeichnung, \r\ndie verwendet wird um die LDAP Identität des Benutzers zu beschreiben. Beispielsweise \r\nbenutzen einige Firmen einen LDAP Server zur Benutzerregistrierung an Ihrem \r\nProxy Server. Wie schon in der \r\nDokumentation beschrieben, ist die LDAP Identität auch bekannt als der Web Username.

LDAP Password Name
Genauso \r\nwie die LDAP Identität eine Bezeichnung ist, so verhält es sich auch mit dem \r\n LDAP Password Name.

\r\n',1045242601,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (75,'USS',2,'Hier ist die Übersicht über die Template Variabeln, die im Benutzerbeitragssystem \r\nzur Verfügung stehen. \r\n

readmore.label
Die übersetzte Bezeichnung, die anzeigt, das ein \r\nBenutzer hier klicken kann, um mehr von dem Beitrag zu lesen. \r\n

responses.label
Die übersetzte Bezeichnung, die anzeigt, das ein \r\nBenutzer hier klicken kann, um Antworten zu diesem Beitrag zu sehen. \r\n

canPost
Eine Bedingungsvarariable die anzeigt, ob ein Benutzer \r\neinen neuen Beitrag verfasen kann. \r\n

post.url
Die URL zum Schreiben eines neuen Beitrages. \r\n

post.label
Die übersetzte Bezeichnung für diese URL.

search.url
Die \r\nURL um WebGUI\'s WebGUI Power Suchformular  zu an- oder auszuschalten. \r\n

search.label
Die übersetzte Bezeichnung für diesen Link.

\r\n

search.form
WebGUI Power Suchformular . \r\n

title.label
Die übersetzte Bezeichnung für die Titel-Spalte. \r\n

thumbnail.label
Die übersetzte Bezeichnung für die Vorschaubild-Spalte. \r\n

date.label
Die übersetzte Bezeichnung für die Datum-Spalte. \r\n

by.label
Die übersetzte Bezeichnung, wer den Beitrag verfasst. \r\n

submissions_loop
Eine Schleif, die jeden einzelnen Beitrag umfasst. \r\n

submission.id
Eine eindeutige Bezeichnung für diesen Beitrag. \r\n

submission.url
Die URL, um diesen Beitrag anzuschauen. \r\n

submission.content
Die verkürzte Wiedergabe des Beitragsinhalts. \r\n\r\n

submission.responses
Die Anzahl der Antworten auf diesen Beitrag. \r\n

submission.title
Der Titel des Beitrags. \r\n

submission.userId
Die ID des Benutzers, der diesen Beitrag veröffentlicht \r\n hat. \r\n

submission.username
Der Benutzername dieses Benutzers. \r\n

submission.status
Der Status dieses Beitrages (freigegeben, ausstehend, \r\n abgelehnt). \r\n

submission.thumbnail
Das Vorschaubild eines hochgeladenen Bildes \r\n (sofern eins vorhanden ist). \r\n

submission.date
Datum des Beitrages. \r\n

submission.currentUser
Bedingungsvariable, ob der aktuelle Benutzer \r\n auch der ist, der diesen Beitrag veröffentlicht hat. \r\n

submission.userProfile
Die URL zu dessen Benutzerprofil. \r\n

submission.secondColumn
Eine Bedingung, ob dieser Beitrag in einem \r\n mehrspaltigen Layout in die zweite Spalte gehört oder nicht. \r\n

submission.thirdColumn
Eine Bedingung, ob dieser Beitrag in einem \r\n mehrspaltigen Layout in die dritte Spalte gehört oder nicht. \r\n

submission.fourthColumn
Eine Bedingung, ob dieser Beitrag in einem \r\n mehrspaltigen Layout in die vierte Spalte gehört oder nicht. \r\n

submission.fifthColumn
Eine Bedingung, ob dieser Beitrag in einem \r\n mehrspaltigen Layout in die fünfte Spalte gehört oder nicht. \r\n

\r\n

firstPage
Link zur ersten Seite. \r\n

lastPage
Link zur letzten Seite. \r\n

nextPage
Link zur nächsten Seite. \r\n

previousPage
Link zur vorherigen Seite. \r\n

pageList
Eine Liste aller Links. \r\n

multiplePages
Eine Bedingung, die anzeigt, ob es mehr als eine \r\nSeite gibt.

',1043949958,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'USS',2,'Benutzerbeitragssysteme sind eine gute Möglichkeit um eine Art Gemeinschaftsgefühl \r\nzu geben oder um kostenlose Beiträge Ihrer Benutzer zu erhalten.

Haupt \r\nTemplate
Wählen Sie ein Layout aus. \r\n

Inhalt filtern
Wählen Sie die Stufe der Filterung des Contents \r\naus.. \r\n

Benutzerbeitragssystem Template
Wählen Sie ein Layout für die \r\neinzelnen Beiträge aus. \r\n\r\n

Wer kann genehmigen?
Welche Gruppe hat die Berechtigung, Beiträge \r\nzu erlauben oder zu verbieten? \r\n

Wer kann Beiträge schreiben?
Welche Gruppe hat die Berechtigung, \r\nBeiträge verfassen zu dürfen?

Beiträge pro Seite
Wieviele \r\nBeiträge sollen pro Seite in der Übersicht angezeigt werden?

Standard \r\nStatus
Sollen Beiträge standardmässig auf "Abgelehnt", "Ausstehend" \r\noder "freigegeben" gestellt werden?

Beachten Sie: Wenn \r\nSie den Status auf "Ausstehend" setzen, dann müssen Sie daran denken, \r\nöfter in Ihrem Posteingang nachzuschauen, ob Beiträge zur Veröffentlichung anstehen. \r\n

Karma pro Benutzerbeitrag
Wieviel Karma soll ein Benutzer erhalten, \r\nwenn er einen Beitrag verfasst? \r\n

Vorschaubilder anzeigen?
Sofern eine Grafik im Beitrag enthalten \r\nist, wird das Vorschaubild im Layout angezeigt. \r\n

Diskussion erlauben?
Do you wish to attach a discussion to this user \r\nsubmission system? If you do, users will be able to comment on each submission. \r\n

Beiträge filtern
Wählen Sie hier aus, wie weit Benutzerbeiträge \r\ngefiltert werden sollen. \r\n

Wer kann Diskussionsbeiträge schreiben?
Wählen Sie die Gruppe aus, \r\ndie berechtigt ist, Diskussionsbeiträge zu verfassen. \r\n

Timeout zum Bearbeiten
Wie lange soll der Benutzer die Möglichkeit \r\nhaben, den von ihm verfassten Beitrag zu bearbeiten, bevor diese Bearbeitungsmöglichkeit \r\nfür ihn gesperrt wird? \r\n

Beachten: Setzen Sie das Limit nicht zu hoch. Das beste an Diskussionen \r\nist ja, dass Sie eine genaue Wiedergabe dessen darstellen sollen, wer wann was \r\ngesagt hat. . \r\n

Karma pro Diskussionsbeitrag
Wieviel Karma soll ein Benutzer erhalten, \r\nwenn er einen Beitrag zur Diskussion verfasst? \r\n \r\n

Wer kann moderieren?
Wählen Sie eine Gruppe aus, die diese Diskussion \r\nmoderieren kann. \r\n

Moderationsart?
Sie können hier auswählen, welche Moderationsart \r\nSie bevorzugen. \r\n

\r\n

Benachrichtigungen über den Eingang neuer Beiträge/Kommentare erscheinen sofort im Posteingang des Moderators.

Bearbeitungszeitpunkt zu Beiträgen hinzufügen?
Möchten \r\nSie einen "Zeitstempel" zu jedem Beitrag hinzufügen? ',1048589165,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'SQLReport',2,'SQL Reports sind vielleicht das effizienteste Werkzeug in WebGUI. Hiermit \r\nhat der Benutzer die Möglichkeit Daten von allen Datenbanken abzufragen, zu \r\ndenen er Zugriff hat. Damit kann er z. B. Verkaufsdaten aus seinem WebShop einbinden \r\noder alle Diskussionsforen auf seiner Website zusammenfassen. \r\n

Makros in der Abfrage vorverarbeiten?
Wenn Sie WebGUI Makros in \r\nIhrer Abfrage nutzen möchten, müssen Sie diesen Punkt aktivieren. \r\n

Debug?
Aktivieren Sie dies, wenn Debugging- und Fehlermeldungen \r\nangezeigt werden sollen. \r\n

Abfrage
Dies ist eine Standard SQL-Abfrage. Sollten Sie mit SQL \r\nnicht vertraut sein, bietet Ihnen \r\nPlain Black Software Übungslehrgänge \r\nin SQL und Datenbankmanagement an. Sie können mit dem ^FormParam();-Makro Abfragen \r\ndynamischer gestalten. \r\n

Report Template
Wie soll der Report dargestellt werden? Normalerweise \r\nbenutzt man HTML-Tabellen um einen SQL-Report zu generieren. Wenn Sie dieses \r\nFeld leerlassen, wird eine Vorlage basierend auf der Ergebnisliste angezeigt. \r\n

Es gibt einige spezielle Makros-Zeichen die zur Erstellung von SQL-Reports \r\ngenutzt werden können. Diese sind \r\n^-;, ^0;, ^1;, ^2;, ^3;, etc. Diese Makros werden ungeachtet der Einstellungen \r\n"Makros in der Abfrage vorverarbeiten" abgearbeitet. Das ^- Makro stellt \r\nTrennpunkte im Dokument dar, um zu kennzeichnen, wo die Anfangs- und Endschleife \r\ndes Reports beginnt. Die numerischen Makros stellen die Datenfelder dar, die \r\nvon Ihrer Abfrage zurückgegeben werden. Es gibt noch ein zusätzliches Makro \r\n(^rownum;), das die Zeilen der Abfrage beginnend bei 1 zählt. Dies können Sie \r\nnutzen, wenn die einzelnen Ergebnissätze nummeriert werden sollen. \r\n

DSN
Data Source Name ist die eindeutige Bezeichnung, \r\ndie von Perl genutzt wird, um den Ort Ihrer Datenbank zu beschreiben. Das Format \r\nist DBI:[Treiber]:[Datenbankname]:[Host]. \r\n

Beispiel: DBI:mysql:WebGUI:localhost \r\n

Datenbankbenutzer
Der Benutzername zur DSN. \r\n

Datenbankpasswort
Das Passwort zur DSN. \r\n

Einträge pro Seite
How many rows should be displayed before splitting the \r\nresults into separate pages? In other words, how many rows should be displayed \r\nper page? \r\n

Carriage Return beachten?
Möchten Sie Carriage Returns in der \r\nErgebnisansicht zu HTML-Umbrüchen konvertieren.

',1048591674,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'SQLReport',2,'SQL Reports sind vielleicht das effizienteste Werkzeug in WebGUI. Hiermit \r\nhat der Benutzer die Möglichkeit Daten von allen Datenbanken abzufragen, zu \r\ndenen er Zugriff hat. Damit kann er z. B. Verkaufsdaten aus seinem WebShop einbinden \r\noder alle Diskussionsforen auf seiner Website zusammenfassen. \r\n

Makros in der Abfrage vorverarbeiten?
Wenn Sie WebGUI Makros in \r\nIhrer Abfrage nutzen möchten, müssen Sie diesen Punkt aktivieren. \r\n

Debug?
Aktivieren Sie dies, wenn Debugging- und Fehlermeldungen \r\nangezeigt werden sollen. \r\n

Abfrage
Dies ist eine Standard SQL-Abfrage. Sollten Sie mit SQL \r\nnicht vertraut sein, bietet Ihnen \r\nPlain Black Software Ãœbungslehrgänge \r\nin SQL und Datenbankmanagement an. Sie können mit dem ^FormParam();-Makro Abfragen \r\ndynamischer gestalten. \r\n

Report Template
Wie soll der Report dargestellt werden? Normalerweise \r\nbenutzt man HTML-Tabellen um einen SQL-Report zu generieren. Wenn Sie dieses \r\nFeld leerlassen, wird eine Vorlage basierend auf der Ergebnisliste angezeigt. \r\n

Es gibt einige spezielle Makros-Zeichen die zur Erstellung von SQL-Reports \r\ngenutzt werden können. Diese sind \r\n^-;, ^0;, ^1;, ^2;, ^3;, etc. Diese Makros werden ungeachtet der Einstellungen \r\n"Makros in der Abfrage vorverarbeiten" abgearbeitet. Das ^- Makro stellt \r\nTrennpunkte im Dokument dar, um zu kennzeichnen, wo die Anfangs- und Endschleife \r\ndes Reports beginnt. Die numerischen Makros stellen die Datenfelder dar, die \r\nvon Ihrer Abfrage zurückgegeben werden. Es gibt noch ein zusätzliches Makro \r\n(^rownum;), das die Zeilen der Abfrage beginnend bei 1 zählt. Dies können Sie \r\nnutzen, wenn die einzelnen Ergebnissätze nummeriert werden sollen. \r\n

Datenbank Link
Der Administrator kann verfügbare Datenbanken konfigurieren, \r\ndie Sie in SQL-Reports verwenden können, ohne dass Sie die DSN, den Benutzernamen \r\noder das Passwort für die Datenbank kennen müssen. Sofern nun ein Datenbanklink \r\nin dieser Liste ausgewählt wurde, werden die nachfolgenden Felder DSN, Benutzer \r\nund Passwort ignoriert..

Sofern die Datenbank, die Sie benötigen nicht \r\nals Datenbank Link definiert ist, können Sie die DSN, den Benutzernamen und \r\ndas Passwort angeben.

DSN
Data Source Name ist die eindeutige Bezeichnung, \r\ndie von Perl genutzt wird, um den Ort Ihrer Datenbank zu beschreiben. Das Format \r\nist DBI:[Treiber]:[Datenbankname]:[Host]. \r\n

Beispiel: DBI:mysql:WebGUI:localhost \r\n

Datenbankbenutzer
Der Benutzername zur DSN. \r\n

Datenbankpasswort
Das Passwort zur DSN. \r\n

Einträge pro Seite
Wie viele Reihen sollen proSeite angezeigt \r\nwerden?

Carriage Return beachten?
Möchten Sie Carriage Returns in der \r\nErgebnisansicht zu HTML-Umbrüchen konvertieren.

',1056836842,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (611,'WebGUI',2,'Firmen Name
\r\nDer Name Ihrer Firma. Er erscheint auf allen Emails und überall dort, wo das CompanyName-Macro eingesetzt wird.

\r\nFirmen Email Adresse
\r\nEine allgemeine Firmen-Emailadresse. Von dieser Adresse werden alle automatischen Emails versendet. Sie kann auch über das WebGUI-Macrosystem genutzt werden.

\r\nFirmen URL
\r\nDie Haupt-URL Ihrer Firma. Diese erscheint auf allen von WebGUI versendeten Emails. Wie schon bei den ersten beiden Funktionen kann auch hier das WebGUI-Macrosystem benutzt werden.',1043425351,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (616,'WebGUI',2,'Pfad zu den WebGUI Extras
\r\nDer Webpfad zum Verzeichnis, dass die WebGUI Grafiken und javascript-Dateien enthält

\r\nMaximale Dateigröße für Anhänge
\r\nDiese Einstellung gilt für alle Wobjects, die das Hochladen von Dateien und Bildern erlauben (wie z. B. Artikel) Die Grösse wird in Kilobytes angegeben.

\r\nGrösse der Vorschaubilder (Thumbnails)
\r\nDie Grösse der längsten Seite einer Grafik. Wenn Sie z. B. den Wert auf 100 setzen und Ihre Grafik ist 400 Pixel hoch und 200 Pixel breit, so wird das Vorschaubild eine Höhe von 100 Pixels und eine Breite von 50 Pixels haben.

Beachten Sie: Vorschaubilder werden automatisch generiert, wenn Grafiken hochgeladen/hinzugefügt werden.

\r\nWeb Pfad für die Anhänge
\r\nDer Webpfad zum Verzeichnis, in dem Anhänge gespeichert werden sollen (z.B. /uploads).

\r\nServerpfad für die Anhänge
\r\nDer lokale Pfad zum Verzeichnis, in dem die Anhänge gespeichert werden sollen, z. B. /var/www/public/uploads. Beachten Sie, dass der Webserver genügend Rechte hat, um in dieses Verzeichnis speichern zu können.',1043425071,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (629,'WebGUI',2,'Gemeinsame Zwischenablage benutzen?
Aktiviert eine einzelne, system-weite \r\nZwischenablage, die von allen Benutzern verwendet wird. Standardmässig gibt \r\nes pro Benutzer eine Zwischenablage.\r\n

Gemeinsamen Mülleimer benutzen?
Aktiviert einen einzelnen, system-weiten \r\nMülleimer. Standardmässig gibt es pro Benutzer einen Mülleimer.

\r\nFalls Proxy benutzt wird: echte Client IP-Adressen benutzen?
Wenn \r\ndies aktiviert und die Umgebungsvariable HTTP_X_FORWARDED_FOR vorhanden ist, \r\nwird dessen Wert anstelle der REMOTE_ADDRESS als die Browser IP-Adresse des \r\nClients verwendet. Dies wird für IP-basierte Gruppen benötigt, um auch in Reverse-proxied, load-balanced System \r\nArchitekturen zu funktionieren. In diesen Umgebungen kommen alle Anfragen von \r\neiner IP-Adresse, der des ProxyServers. Wenn Sie nicht sicher sind, wofür diese \r\nFunktion nötig ist, lassen Sie sie ausgeschaltet.\r\n

Proxy Caching unterbinden
\r\nEinige Firmen haben Proxy Server im Einsatz, die Probleme mit WebGUI verursachen können. Wenn Sie solche Problem feststellen, können Sie die Einstellungen auf \'JA\' setzen. Beachten Sie aber bitte, dass WebGUI\'s URLs nicht mehr so benutzerfreundlich sein werden, wenn dieses Feature aktiviert ist.\r\n

\r\nFehlersuche anzeigen
\r\nWenn dies aktiviert ist, werden erweiterte Meldungen, die lediglich für Entwickler oder Administratoren interessant sein können, angezeigt. Dies ist hilfreich beim Lösen eines Problems

\r\nSeitenstatistik aktivieren
\r\nWebGUI kann einige statistische Informationen über ihre Seite speichern. Jedoch wird dadurch die Prozessorbelastung erhöht und die Datenbank wird etwas grösser. Aktivieren Sie dies nur, wenn Sie kein externes WebStatistik-Programm nutzen.

\r\n',1055249875,NULL); @@ -10124,7 +10124,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (619,'WebGUI',2,'Diese Funktion l INSERT INTO international VALUES (618,'WebGUI',2,'SMTP Server
Dies ist die Adresse ihres lokalen \r\nMailservers. Diese wird in allen Funktionen benötigt, die das Internet Emailsystem \r\nverwenden (wie z. B. Passwort wiederherstellen). \r\n

Optional können Sie auch den Pfad zu sendmail angeben, wenn ein Sendmail-Server \r\nauf der gleichen Maschine wie WebGUI läuft. Bei den meisten Linux-Servern ist \r\ndies "/usr/lib/sendmail".

Email Fussbereich\r\n

Dieser \r\nFusstext ist für Makros vorgesehen und wird jeder Email, die von WebGUI versandt \r\nwird, angehängt.

Bei neuem Benutzer benachrichtigen?
Soll jemand \r\ninformiert werden, sofern sich jemand anonym registriert hat? \r\n

Gruppe, die bei neuem Benutzer benachrichtig werden soll
Welche \r\nGruppe soll benachrichtigt werden, wenn sich ein neuer Benutzer registriert?

',1045243460,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (614,'WebGUI',2,'Styles werden benutzt, um das "Look and feel" ihrer WebGUI Seiten \r\nzu bestimmen. Mit WebGUI können sie eine unbegrenzte Anzahl von Styles \r\nverwenden, daher können sie so viele verschiedene Darstellungen benutzen, wie \r\nsie möchten. Sie könnten z. B. Seiten haben, die dem Layout bzw. Corporate Design \r\nihres Unternehmens entsprechen, oder Seiten, die dem Erscheinungsbild von Yahoo \r\nähnlich sind, usw. Genauso können sie auch Seiten erstellen, die wie die Seiten \r\neines Buches aussehen. Mit dem Styleverwaltungs-Tool haben Sie die ultimative \r\nKontrolle über all ihre Designs.

Es gibt bereits verschiedene in WebGUI eingebaute \r\nStyles. Die ersteren werden von WebGUI selbst benutzt und sollten daher  nicht \r\nbearbeitet oder gelöscht werden. Die letztern sind einige Beispiel-Styles und \r\nkönnen als Vorlage für neue Styles verwendet oder auch gelöscht werden. \r\n

Clipboard
Dieser Style wird von der Zwischenablage benötigt

Fail Safe
Wenn \r\nsie einen Style löschen, der bereits auf einigen Seiten in Benutzung ist, wird \r\ndieser FailSafe-Style diesen Seiten zugeordnet. Der Style hat einen weissen \r\nHintergrund und eine einfache Navigation. \r\n

Make Page Printable
Dieser Style wird benutzt, wenn sie ein ^r; \r\nMakro in Ihren Seiten einsetzen und der Besucher dann darauf klickt - er erhält \r\ndann die Druckversion der Seite. Sie haben hier die Möglichkeit, ein Logo und \r\neine Copyright-Meldung auf der Seite einzubinden. \r\n

Packages
Dieser Style wird vom Paketmanager benutzt. \r\n

Trash
Dieser Style wird vom Mülleimer genutzt. \r\n

\r\n

\r\nDemo Style
Dies ist ein Beispiellayout, das von einer Templates-Seite \r\ngenommen wurde\r\n(www.freewebtemplates.com). \r\n

Plain Black Software (black) & (white)
Diese Layouts wurden \r\nauf der Plainblackseite verwendet. \r\n

Yahoo!®
Dies ist das Design von Yahoo!®. (genutzt ohne Berechtigung.) \r\n

WebGUI
Dies ist ein einfaches Design mit WebGUI logos. \r\n

WebGUI 4
Dieser Style wurde seit WebGUI Version 4 verwendet.

',1055248502,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (613,'WebGUI',2,'Benutzer sind die Konten, die Berechtigungen zu verschiedenen Bereichen in WebGUI \r\nhaben. Es gibt 2 Standard-Benutzer: Admin und Visitor. \r\n

\r\n

Admin
Unter Admin versteht man genau das, was man unter diesem \r\nBegriff erwartet. Dies ist ein Benutzer mit unbegrenzten Berechtigungen in der \r\nWebGUI Umgebung.

\r\n

Visitor
Der Visitor(Besucher) ist das genaue Gegenteil des Admins. \r\nDer Visitor hat keine Rechte und ein Besucher, der nicht eingeloggt ist, wird \r\nvom System als Visitor erkannt

\r\n

Neuen Benutzer hinzufügen.
Klicken Sie hier, um zur "Benutzer \r\nhinzufügen" Seite zu kommen. \r\n

\r\n

Suchen
Sie können nach Benutzernamen und Emailadressen suchen. \r\nDie Suche kann hier auch eingeschränkt werden, z. B. auf die Suche nach aktivierten \r\nBenutzern.

',1044375306,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (606,'WebGUI',2,'Stellen Sie sich Seiten als Behälter für Inhalte vor. Wenn Sie z. B. einen Brief \r\nan den Herausgeber Ihres Lieblingsmagazins schreiben möchten, starten Sie eine \r\nTextverarbeitung und schreiben Ihre Gedanken nieder. Genauso verhält es sich \r\nmit WebGUI. Erstellen Sie eine Seite und füllen sie mit Inhalt.. \r\n

Titel
Der Seitentitel. Titel sollten beschreibend, aber nicht zu \r\nlang sein.

Menü Titel
Ein kürzerer oder \r\nabgeänderter Titel, der in der Navigation erscheinen soll. Wenn Sie hier nichts \r\neingeben, wird die Eingabe verwendet, die Sie bei \'Titel\' eingegeben haben. \r\n

Von der Navigation verbergen?
Wählen Sie \'Ja\' um diese Seite \r\naus der Navigation auszublenden. \r\n

Beachte: Die Seite wird nur aus der Navigation ausgeblendet, aber \r\nnicht aus dem Seitenbaum oder von der SiteMap, nur ausden Navigationsmakros.

In \r\nneuem Fenster öffnen?
Wählen Sie "Ja" um die Seite in einem \r\nneuen Fenster zu öffnen.

URL der Seite
Wenn Sie eine Seite erstellen wird normalerweise \r\ndie URL aufgrund des Seitentitels erstellt. Wenn Sie damit nicht zufrieden sind, \r\nkönnen Sie es hier ändern. \r\n

Sprache
Wählen Sie die Standardsprache für diese Seite. Alle mittels \r\nWebGUI generierten Texte erscheinen in dieser Sprache und das Charakterset wird \r\nentsprechend der ausgewählten Sprache übernommen (z.B. ä, ö, ü im Deutschen). \r\n

Weiterleitungs URL
Der Besucher der Seite wird zu der Seite weitergeleitet, \r\ndie Sie hier angegeben haben. Wenn Sie dann in Zukunft diese weitergeleitete \r\nSeite wieder ändern möchten, müssen Sie dies in den Admininstrativen Funktionen im \r\nBereich "Verwalten-Baumstruktur" vornehmen. \r\n

Template
Standardmässig hat WebGUI einen grossen Inhaltsbereich, \r\num Wobjects zu platzieren. Dennoch können Sie Ihren Content durch Auswahl eines \r\nanderen Templates in verschiedene Bereiche aufteilen. \r\n

Zusammenfassung
Eine kurze Zusammenfassung der Seite. Dieser Bereich \r\nwird sowohl zum Veröffentlichen von beschreibenden MetaTags als auch als Beschreibungstext \r\nin der Sitemap verwendet. \r\n

Meta Tags
Hier können Sie beliebige Meta Tags definieren. Die Seite Meta Tag Builder gibt Ihnen hierzu \r\neinige Tipps.

Erfahrene Anwender: Sie können hier auch andere Dinge, \r\nwie z. B. JavaScript oder Links zu externen Stylesheets, einfügen. \r\n

Standard Meta Tags benutzen?
Sollten Sie keine eigenen MetaTags \r\ndefinieren wollen, kann WebGUI diese basierend auf dem Seitentitel und Ihrem \r\nFirmennamen erzeugen. Aktivieren Sie diese Checkbox, um die WebGUI-generierten \r\nMetaTags einzuschalten. \r\n

Style
Standardmässig erbt eine Seite, die Sie erstellen, ihre Merkmale \r\nvon der übergeordneten Seite. Eines dieser Merkmale ist der Style. Wählen Sie \r\nhier einen Style aus der Liste aus, den Siefür diese Seite verwenden möchten. \r\nWeitere Details finden Sie unter Style hinzufügen. \r\n

Wenn Sie "Ja" unterhalb des Style-Auswahlmenus aktivieren, wird \r\nder Style für alle Seiten unterhalb dieser Seite übernommen. \r\n

Anfangsdatum
Das Datum, ab dem die Seite sichtbar sein soll. Vor \r\ndiesem Datum sehen nur Contentmanager mit der Berechtigung zur Bearbeitung diese \r\nSeite. \r\n

Ende Datum
Das Datum, bis dem die Seite sichtbar sein soll. Nach \r\ndiesem Datum sehen nur Contentmanager mit der Berechtigung zur Bearbeitung diese \r\nSeite. \r\n \r\n

Besitzer
Der Besitzer der Seite ist gewöhnlich die Person, die \r\ndie Seite erstellt hat. \r\nDiese hat die vollen Rechte zum Bearbeiten und Anschauen der Seite.

Beachte: Der \r\nBesitzer kann nur von einem Administrator geändert werden. \r\n

Wer kann anschauen?
Wählen Sie die Gruppe aus, die diese Seite \r\nanschauen kann. Wenn Sie möchten, dass Visitors (Beuscher) und registrierte \r\nBenutzer dieSeite anschauen können, so sollten Sie die "Everybody" (Jeder) \r\nGruppe auswählen.

Wer kann bearbeiten?

Wählen Sie die Gruppe \r\naus, die diese Seite bearbeiten kann. Die Gruppe, die bearbeiten kann, darf \r\nauch jederzeit die Seite anschauen.

Sie können diese Berechtigungen an alle Seiten unterhalb dieser Seite vergeben. \r\n

Als nächstes?
Hier können Sie gleich zu Ihrer neuen Seite gelangen \r\noder zu der vorherigen zurückkehren.

\r\n',1055248403,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (606,'WebGUI',2,'Stellen Sie sich Seiten als Behälter für Inhalte vor. Wenn Sie z. B. einen Brief \r\nan den Herausgeber Ihres Lieblingsmagazins schreiben möchten, starten Sie eine \r\nTextverarbeitung und schreiben Ihre Gedanken nieder. Genauso verhält es sich \r\nmit WebGUI. Erstellen Sie eine Seite und füllen sie mit Inhalt.. \r\n

Titel
Der Seitentitel. Titel sollten beschreibend, aber nicht zu \r\nlang sein.

Menü Titel
Ein kürzerer oder \r\nabgeänderter Titel, der in der Navigation erscheinen soll. Wenn Sie hier nichts \r\neingeben, wird die Eingabe verwendet, die Sie bei \'Titel\' eingegeben haben. \r\n

Von der Navigation verbergen?
Wählen Sie \'Ja\' um diese Seite \r\naus der Navigation auszublenden. \r\n

Beachte: Die Seite wird nur aus der Navigation ausgeblendet, aber \r\nnicht aus dem Seitenbaum oder von der SiteMap, nur ausden Navigationsmakros.

In \r\nneuem Fenster öffnen?
Wählen Sie "Ja" um die Seite in einem \r\nneuen Fenster zu öffnen.

URL der Seite
Wenn Sie eine Seite erstellen wird normalerweise \r\ndie URL aufgrund des Seitentitels erstellt. Wenn Sie damit nicht zufrieden sind, \r\nkönnen Sie es hier ändern. \r\n

Sprache
Wählen Sie die Standardsprache für diese Seite. Alle mittels \r\nWebGUI generierten Texte erscheinen in dieser Sprache und das Charakterset wird \r\nentsprechend der ausgewählten Sprache übernommen (z.B. ä, ö, ü im Deutschen). \r\n

Weiterleitungs URL
Der Besucher der Seite wird zu der Seite weitergeleitet, \r\ndie Sie hier angegeben haben. Wenn Sie dann in Zukunft diese weitergeleitete \r\nSeite wieder ändern möchten, müssen Sie dies in den Admininstrativen Funktionen im \r\nBereich "Verwalten-Baumstruktur" vornehmen. \r\n

Template
Standardmässig hat WebGUI einen grossen Inhaltsbereich, \r\num Wobjects zu platzieren. Dennoch können Sie Ihren Content durch Auswahl eines \r\nanderen Templates in verschiedene Bereiche aufteilen. \r\n

Zusammenfassung
Eine kurze Zusammenfassung der Seite. Dieser Bereich \r\nwird sowohl zum Veröffentlichen von beschreibenden MetaTags als auch als Beschreibungstext \r\nin der Sitemap verwendet. \r\n

Meta Tags
Hier können Sie beliebige Meta Tags definieren. Die Seite Meta Tag Builder gibt Ihnen hierzu \r\neinige Tipps.

Erfahrene Anwender: Sie können hier auch andere Dinge, \r\nwie z. B. JavaScript oder Links zu externen Stylesheets, einfügen. \r\n

Standard Meta Tags benutzen?
Sollten Sie keine eigenen MetaTags \r\ndefinieren wollen, kann WebGUI diese basierend auf dem Seitentitel und Ihrem \r\nFirmennamen erzeugen. Aktivieren Sie diese Checkbox, um die WebGUI-generierten \r\nMetaTags einzuschalten. \r\n

Cache Timeout
Die Zeit, die die Seite für registrierte Benutzer \r\ngecachet werden soll. \r\n

Cache Timeout (Besucher)
Die Zeit, die die Seite für Besucher gecachet \r\nwerden soll. \r\n

Beachte: Das Caching (Zwischenspeichern) ist nur verfügbar, wenn der \r\nAdministrator das Cache::FileCache Perl Modul installiert hat. Das Verwenden \r\nvon Caching kann die Performance um bis zu 1000% erhöhen.  \r\n

Template
Stanardmässig verwendet WebGUI einen grossen Contentbereich \r\num die Wobjects zu platzieren. Sie können nun durch die Auswahl eines anderen \r\nTemplates den Inhalt, und damit das Platzieren von Wobjects, auf verschiedene \r\nBereiche aufteilen. \r\n

\r\n

Style
Standardmässig erbt eine Seite, die Sie erstellen, ihre Merkmale \r\nvon der übergeordneten Seite. Eines dieser Merkmale ist der Style. Wählen Sie \r\nhier einen Style aus der Liste aus, den Siefür diese Seite verwenden möchten. \r\nWeitere Details finden Sie unter Style hinzufügen. \r\n

\r\n

Wenn Sie "Ja" unterhalb des Style-Auswahlmenus aktivieren, wird \r\nder Style für alle Seiten unterhalb dieser Seite übernommen. \r\n

Anfangsdatum
Das Datum, ab dem die Seite sichtbar sein soll. Vor \r\ndiesem Datum sehen nur Contentmanager mit der Berechtigung zur Bearbeitung diese \r\nSeite. \r\n

Ende Datum
Das Datum, bis dem die Seite sichtbar sein soll. Nach \r\ndiesem Datum sehen nur Contentmanager mit der Berechtigung zur Bearbeitung diese \r\nSeite. \r\n \r\n

Besitzer
Der Besitzer der Seite ist gewöhnlich die Person, die \r\ndie Seite erstellt hat. \r\nDiese hat die vollen Rechte zum Bearbeiten und Anschauen der Seite.

Beachte: Der \r\nBesitzer kann nur von einem Administrator geändert werden. \r\n

Wer kann anschauen?
Wählen Sie die Gruppe aus, die diese Seite \r\nanschauen kann. Wenn Sie möchten, dass Visitors (Beuscher) und registrierte \r\nBenutzer dieSeite anschauen können, so sollten Sie die "Everybody" (Jeder) \r\nGruppe auswählen.

Wer kann bearbeiten?

Wählen Sie die Gruppe \r\naus, die diese Seite bearbeiten kann. Die Gruppe, die bearbeiten kann, darf \r\nauch jederzeit die Seite anschauen.

Sie können diese Berechtigungen an alle Seiten unterhalb dieser Seite vergeben. \r\n

Als nächstes?
Hier können Sie gleich zu Ihrer neuen Seite gelangen \r\noder zu der vorherigen zurückkehren.

\r\n',1056837275,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (884,'WebGUI',1,'Pop Up',1044705337,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (883,'WebGUI',1,'Inline (when supported)',1044705322,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (882,'WebGUI',1,'Editor Mode',1044705246,NULL); @@ -10154,18 +10154,18 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (4,'HttpProxy',2,'Timeout',1048242651,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (3,'HttpProxy',2,'HTTP Proxy',1040395372,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (2,'HttpProxy',2,'HTTP Proxy ändern',1040395360,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (1,'HttpProxy',2,'URL',1040395344,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (840,'WebGUI',1,'These macros are designed to provide programming-like functionality. They are powerful when used appropriately, and dangerous when used carelessly. Take care when using these macros.\r\n\r\n

\r\nNOTE: These macros are included in WebGUI in order to provide very powerful display mechanisms. Though they could be used to write simple web applications, this is not their intended use, nor is it supported or condoned by Plain Black. If you find yourself trying to do something like that, just write a macro. =)\r\n\r\n

\r\n\r\n^D; or ^D(); - Date
\r\nThe current date and time.\r\n

\r\n\r\nYou can configure the date by using date formatting symbols. For instance, if you created a macro like this ^D(\"%c %D, %y\"); it would output September 26, 2001. The following are the available date formatting symbols:\r\n

\r\n\r\n
%%%
%y4 digit year
%Y2 digit year
%m2 digit month
%Mvariable digit month
%cmonth name
%d2 digit day of month
%Dvariable digit day of month
%wday of week name
%h2 digit base 12 hour
%Hvariable digit base 12 hour
%j2 digit base 24 hour
%Jvariable digit base 24 hour
%plower case am/pm
%Pupper case AM/PM
%zuser preference date format
%Zuser preference time format
\r\n

\r\n\r\n^Env()
\r\nCan be used to display a web server environment variable on a page. The environment variables available on each server are different, but you can find out which ones your web server has by going to: http://www.yourwebguisite.com/env.pl\r\n

\r\n\r\nThe macro should be specified like this ^Env(\"REMOTE_ADDR\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n^Execute();
\r\nAllows a content manager or administrator to execute an external program. Takes the format of ^Execute(\"/this/file.sh\");.\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^FormParam();
\r\nThis macro is mainly used in generating dynamic queries in SQL Reports. Using this macro you can pull the value of any form field simply by specifing the name of the form field, like this: ^FormParam(\"phoneNumber\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^If();
\r\nA simple conditional statement (IF/THEN/ELSE) to control layout and messages.\r\n

\r\nExamples:
\r\nDisplay Happy New Year on 1st January:\r\n ^If(\'^D(\"%m%d\");\' eq \'0101\' , Happy New Year);\r\n

\r\nDisplay a message to people on your subnet (192.168.1.*):
\r\n^If(\'^Env(\"REMOTE_ADDR\");\' =~ /^192.168.1/,\"Hi co-worker\",\"Hi Stranger\");\r\n

\r\nDisplay a message to Windows users:
\r\n ^If(\'^Env(\"HTTP_USER_AGENT\");\' =~ /windows/i,\"Hey... Linux is free !\");\r\n

\r\nDisplay a message if a user is behind a proxy:
\r\n ^If(\'^Env(\"HTTP_VIA\");\' ne \"\", You\'re behind a proxy !, Proxy-free is the best...);\r\n

\r\nDisplay Good Morning/Afternoon/Evening:
\r\n ^If(^D(\"%J\");<=12,Good Morning,^If(^D(\"%J\");<=18,Good Afternoon,Good evening););\r\n

\r\n\r\n^Include();
\r\nAllows a content manager or administrator to include a file from the local filesystem. \r\n

\r\nExample: ^Include(\"/this/file.html\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n^International();
\r\nPull a translated message from the internationalization system.\r\n

\r\nExample: ^International(45,\"Article\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^Quote();
\r\nUse this to escape a string before using it in a database query.\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^Page();
\r\nThis can be used to retrieve information about the current page. For instance it could be used to get the page URL like this ^Page(\"urlizedTitle\"); or to get the menu title like this ^Page(\"menuTitle\");.\r\n

\r\n\r\n^SQL();
\r\nA one line SQL report. Sometimes you just need to pull something back from the database quickly. This macro is also useful in extending the SQL Report wobject. It uses the numeric macros (^0; ^1; ^2; etc) to position data and can also use the ^rownum; macro just like the SQL Report wobject. Examples:

\r\n ^SQL(\"select count(*) from users\",\"There are ^0; users on this system.\");\r\n

\r\n^SQL(\"select userId,username from users order by username\",\"<a href=\'^/;?op=viewProfile&uid=^0;\'>^1;</a><br>\");\r\n

\r\n^URLEncode();
\r\nThis macro is mainly useful in SQL reports, but it could be useful elsewhere as well. It takes the input of a string and URL Encodes it so that the string can be passed through a URL. It\'s syntax looks like this: ^URLEncode(\"Is this my string?\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^User();
\r\nThis macro will allow you to display any information from a user\'s account or profile. For instance, if you wanted to display a user\'s email address you\'d create this macro: ^User(\"email\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n^*; or ^*(); - Random Number
\r\nA randomly generated number. This is often used on images (such as banner ads) that you want to ensure do not cache. In addition, you may configure this macro like this ^*(100); to create a random number between 0 and 100.\r\n

\r\n\r\n^-;,^0;,^1;,^2;,^3;, etc.
\r\nThese macros are reserved for system/wobject-specific functions as in the SQL Report wobject and the Body in the Style Manager.\r\n

\r\n',1051223757,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (840,'WebGUI',1,'These macros are designed to provide programming-like functionality. They are powerful when used appropriately, and dangerous when used carelessly. Take care when using these macros.\r\n\r\n

\r\nNOTE: These macros are included in WebGUI in order to provide very powerful display mechanisms. Though they could be used to write simple web applications, this is not their intended use, nor is it supported or condoned by Plain Black. If you find yourself trying to do something like that, just write a macro. =) By default these macros are disabled to protect the security of your site and server, and only your administrator can enable them.\r\n\r\n

\r\n\r\n^D; or ^D(); - Date
\r\nThe current date and time.\r\n

\r\n\r\nYou can configure the date by using date formatting symbols. For instance, if you created a macro like this ^D(\"%c %D, %y\"); it would output September 26, 2001. The following are the available date formatting symbols:\r\n

\r\n\r\n
%%%
%y4 digit year
%Y2 digit year
%m2 digit month
%Mvariable digit month
%cmonth name
%d2 digit day of month
%Dvariable digit day of month
%wday of week name
%h2 digit base 12 hour
%Hvariable digit base 12 hour
%j2 digit base 24 hour
%Jvariable digit base 24 hour
%plower case am/pm
%Pupper case AM/PM
%zuser preference date format
%Zuser preference time format
\r\n

\r\n\r\n^Env()
\r\nCan be used to display a web server environment variable on a page. The environment variables available on each server are different, but you can find out which ones your web server has by going to: http://www.yourwebguisite.com/env.pl\r\n

\r\n\r\nThe macro should be specified like this ^Env(\"REMOTE_ADDR\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n^Execute();
\r\nAllows a content manager or administrator to execute an external program. Takes the format of ^Execute(\"/this/file.sh\");.\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^FormParam();
\r\nThis macro is mainly used in generating dynamic queries in SQL Reports. Using this macro you can pull the value of any form field simply by specifing the name of the form field, like this: ^FormParam(\"phoneNumber\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^If();
\r\nA simple conditional statement (IF/THEN/ELSE) to control layout and messages.\r\n

\r\nExamples:
\r\nDisplay Happy New Year on 1st January:\r\n ^If(\'^D(\"%m%d\");\' eq \'0101\' , Happy New Year);\r\n

\r\nDisplay a message to people on your subnet (192.168.1.*):
\r\n^If(\'^Env(\"REMOTE_ADDR\");\' =~ /^192.168.1/,\"Hi co-worker\",\"Hi Stranger\");\r\n

\r\nDisplay a message to Windows users:
\r\n ^If(\'^Env(\"HTTP_USER_AGENT\");\' =~ /windows/i,\"Hey... Linux is free !\");\r\n

\r\nDisplay a message if a user is behind a proxy:
\r\n ^If(\'^Env(\"HTTP_VIA\");\' ne \"\", You\'re behind a proxy !, Proxy-free is the best...);\r\n

\r\nDisplay Good Morning/Afternoon/Evening:
\r\n ^If(^D(\"%J\");<=12,Good Morning,^If(^D(\"%J\");<=18,Good Afternoon,Good evening););\r\n

\r\n\r\n^Include();
\r\nAllows a content manager or administrator to include a file from the local filesystem. \r\n

\r\nExample: ^Include(\"/this/file.html\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n^International();
\r\nPull a translated message from the internationalization system.\r\n

\r\nExample: ^International(45,\"Article\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^Quote();
\r\nUse this to escape a string before using it in a database query.\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^Page();
\r\nThis can be used to retrieve information about the current page. For instance it could be used to get the page URL like this ^Page(\"urlizedTitle\"); or to get the menu title like this ^Page(\"menuTitle\");.\r\n

\r\n\r\n^SQL();
\r\nA one line SQL report. Sometimes you just need to pull something back from the database quickly. This macro is also useful in extending the SQL Report wobject. It uses the numeric macros (^0; ^1; ^2; etc) to position data and can also use the ^rownum; macro just like the SQL Report wobject. Examples:

\r\n ^SQL(\"select count(*) from users\",\"There are ^0; users on this system.\");\r\n

\r\n^SQL(\"select userId,username from users order by username\",\"<a href=\'^/;?op=viewProfile&uid=^0;\'>^1;</a><br>\");\r\n

\r\n^URLEncode();
\r\nThis macro is mainly useful in SQL reports, but it could be useful elsewhere as well. It takes the input of a string and URL Encodes it so that the string can be passed through a URL. It\'s syntax looks like this: ^URLEncode(\"Is this my string?\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n^User();
\r\nThis macro will allow you to display any information from a user\'s account or profile. For instance, if you wanted to display a user\'s email address you\'d create this macro: ^User(\"email\");\r\n

\r\n\r\n^*; or ^*(); - Random Number
\r\nA randomly generated number. This is often used on images (such as banner ads) that you want to ensure do not cache. In addition, you may configure this macro like this ^*(100); to create a random number between 0 and 100.\r\n

\r\n\r\n^-;,^0;,^1;,^2;,^3;, etc.
\r\nThese macros are reserved for system/wobject-specific functions as in the SQL Report wobject and the Body in the Style Manager.\r\n

\r\n',1057090848,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (1,'Discussion',1,'Filter Post',1046607477,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (419,'WebGUI',1,'Remove everything but the text.',1046637533,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (526,'WebGUI',1,'Remove JavaScript and negate macros.',1047838780,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (891,'WebGUI',1,'Only negate macros.',1047838859,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (892,'WebGUI',1,'Discussion',1046637952,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (893,'WebGUI',1,'Wobject Properties',1046638419,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (842,'WebGUI',12,'These macros are used to create navigation on the site. \r\n

^C; or ^C(); - Crumb Trail
A dynamically generated crumb trail to \r\nthe current page. You can optionally specify a delimeter to be used between page \r\nnames by using ^C(::);. The default delimeter is >. \r\n

NOTE: The .crumbTrail style sheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^FlexMenu;
This menu macro creates a top-level menu that expands as \r\nthe user selects each menu item. \r\n

^H; or ^H(); - Home Link
A link to the home page of this site. In \r\naddition you can change the link text by creating a macro like this ^H(\"Go \r\nHome\");. \r\n

NOTES: You can also use the special case ^H(linkonly); to return only \r\nthe URL to the home page and nothing more. Also, the .homeLink style sheet class \r\nis tied to this macro. \r\n

^M; or ^M(); - Current Menu (Vertical)
A vertical menu containing \r\nthe sub-pages at the current level. In addition, you may configure this macro by \r\nspecifying how many levels deep the menu should go. By default it will show only \r\nthe first level. To go three levels deep create a macro like this ^M(3);. \r\nIf you set the macro to \"0\" it will track the entire site tree. \r\n

^m; - Current Menu (Horizontal)
A horizontal menu containing the \r\nsub-pages at the current level. You can optionally specify a delimeter to be \r\nused between page names by using ^m(:--:);. The default delimeter is ·. \r\n

^P; or ^P(); - Previous Menu (Vertical)
A vertical menu containing \r\nthe sub-pages at the previous level. In addition, you may configure this macro \r\nby specifying how many levels deep the menu should go. By default it will show \r\nonly the first level. To go three levels deep create a macro like this \r\n^P(3);. If you set the macro to \"0\" it will track the entire site tree. \r\n

^p; - Previous Menu (Horizontal)
A horizontal menu containing the \r\nsub-pages at the previous level. You can optionally specify a delimeter to be \r\nused between page names by using ^p(:--:);. The default delimeter is ·. \r\n

^rootmenu; or ^rootmenu(); (Horizontal)
Creates a horizontal menu \r\nof the various roots on your system (except for the WebGUI system roots). You \r\ncan optionally specify a menu delimiter like this: ^rootmenu(|); \r\n

^S(); - Specific SubMenu (Vertical)
This macro allows you to get \r\nthe submenu of any page, starting with the page you specified. For instance, you \r\ncould get the home page submenu by creating a macro that looks like this \r\n^S(\"home\",0);. The first value is the urlized title of the page and the \r\nsecond value is the depth you\'d like the menu to go. By default it will show \r\nonly the first level. To go three levels deep create a macro like this \r\n^S(\"home\",3);. \r\n

^s(); - Specific SubMenu (Horizontal)
This macro allows you to get \r\nthe submenu of any page, starting with the page you specified. For instance, you \r\ncould get the home page submenu by creating a macro that looks like this \r\n^s(\"home\");. The value is the urlized title of the page. You can \r\noptionally specify a delimeter to be used between page names by using \r\n^s(\"home\",\":--:\");. The default delimeter is ·. \r\n

^Synopsis; or ^Synopsis(); Menu
This macro allows you to get the \r\nsubmenu of a page along with the synopsis of each link. You may specify an \r\ninteger to specify how many levels deep to traverse the page tree. \r\n

NOTES: The .synopsis_sub, .synopsis_summary, and .synopsis_title style \r\nsheet classes are tied to this macro. \r\n

^T; or ^T(); - Top Level Menu (Vertical)
A vertical menu containing \r\nthe main pages of the site (aka the sub-pages from the home page). In addition, \r\nyou may configure this macro by specifying how many levels deep the menu should \r\ngo. By default it will show only the first level. To go three levels deep create \r\na macro like this ^T(3);. If you set the macro to \"0\" it will track the \r\nentire site tree. \r\n

^t; - Top Level Menu (Horizontal)
A vertical menu containing the \r\nmain pages of the site (aka the sub-pages from the home page). You can \r\noptionally specify a delimeter to be used between page names by using ^t(:--:);. \r\nThe default delimeter is ·. \r\n

^/; - System URL
The URL to the gateway script (example: \r\n/index.pl/). \r\n

^\\; - Page URL
The URL to the current page (example: \r\n/index.pl/pagename).

',1048550183,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (842,'WebGUI',12,'These macros are used to create navigation on the site. \r\n

^C; or ^C(); - Crumb Trail
A dynamically generated crumb trail to \r\nthe current page. You can optionally specify a delimeter to be used between page \r\nnames by using ^C(::);. The default delimeter is >. \r\n

NOTE: The .crumbTrail style sheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^FlexMenu;
This menu macro creates a top-level menu that expands as \r\nthe user selects each menu item. \r\n

^H; or ^H(); - Home Link
A link to the home page of this site. In \r\naddition you can change the link text by creating a macro like this ^H(\"Go \r\nHome\");. \r\n

NOTES: You can also use the special case ^H(linkonly); to return only \r\nthe URL to the home page and nothing more. Also, the .homeLink style sheet class \r\nis tied to this macro. \r\n

^M; or ^M(); - Current Menu (Vertical)
A vertical menu containing \r\nthe sub-pages at the current level. In addition, you may configure this macro by \r\nspecifying how many levels deep the menu should go. By default it will show only \r\nthe first level. To go three levels deep create a macro like this ^M(3);. \r\nIf you set the macro to \"0\" it will track the entire site tree. \r\n

^m; - Current Menu (Horizontal)
A horizontal menu containing the \r\nsub-pages at the current level. You can optionally specify a delimeter to be \r\nused between page names by using ^m(:--:);. The default delimeter is ·. \r\n

^PreviousDropMenu;
Create a drop down menu containing the sub-pages \r\nat the previous level in the page tree. \r\n

Example: ^PreviousDropMenu; \r\n

^P; or ^P(); - Previous Menu (Vertical)
A vertical menu containing \r\nthe sub-pages at the previous level. In addition, you may configure this macro \r\nby specifying how many levels deep the menu should go. By default it will show \r\nonly the first level. To go three levels deep create a macro like this \r\n^P(3);. If you set the macro to \"0\" it will track the entire site tree. \r\n

^p; - Previous Menu (Horizontal)
A horizontal menu containing the \r\nsub-pages at the previous level. You can optionally specify a delimeter to be \r\nused between page names by using ^p(:--:);. The default delimeter is ·. \r\n

^rootmenu; or ^rootmenu(); (Horizontal)
Creates a horizontal menu \r\nof the various roots on your system (except for the WebGUI system roots). You \r\ncan optionally specify a menu delimiter like this: ^rootmenu(|); \r\n

^RootTab;
Create a tab navigation system from the roots on your \r\nsite (except WebGUI\'s system roots) similar to the tabs used in the tab forms \r\n(editing wobjects or pages). \r\n

NOTE: Has two special style sheet classes: .RootTabOn{} and \r\n.RootTabOff{}. \r\n

Example:
<style> .rootTabOn { line-height: 17px; font-size: \r\n16px; spacing: 3px; border: 1px solid black; border-bottom-width: 0px; \r\nbackground-color: #333333; z-index: 10000; padding: 3px 9px 5px 9px; color: \r\nwhite; } .rootTabOn A, .rootTabOn A:visited { color: white; font-weight: bold; \r\ntext-decoration: none; } .rootTabOff { line-height: 15px; font-size: 14px; \r\nborder: 1px solid black; border-bottom-width: 0px; background-color: #c8c8c8; \r\nz-index: 1000; padding: 2px 9px 2px 9px; } .rootTabOff A, .rootTabOff A:visited \r\n{ color: black; text-decoration: underline; } .rootTabOff A:hover { font-weight: \r\nbold; } </style> ^RootTab; \r\n

^SpecificDropMenu();
Create a drop down menu starting at a specific \r\npoint in your navigation tree. This takes two parameters. The first is the url \r\nof the page to start with and the second (optional parameter) is the depth to \r\ntraverse to. \r\n

Example: ^SpecificDropMenu(\"home\",3); \r\n

^S(); - Specific SubMenu (Vertical)
This macro allows you to get \r\nthe submenu of any page, starting with the page you specified. For instance, you \r\ncould get the home page submenu by creating a macro that looks like this \r\n^S(\"home\",0);. The first value is the urlized title of the page and the \r\nsecond value is the depth you\'d like the menu to go. By default it will show \r\nonly the first level. To go three levels deep create a macro like this \r\n^S(\"home\",3);. \r\n

^s(); - Specific SubMenu (Horizontal)
This macro allows you to get \r\nthe submenu of any page, starting with the page you specified. For instance, you \r\ncould get the home page submenu by creating a macro that looks like this \r\n^s(\"home\");. The value is the urlized title of the page. You can \r\noptionally specify a delimeter to be used between page names by using \r\n^s(\"home\",\":--:\");. The default delimeter is ·. \r\n

^Synopsis; or ^Synopsis(); Menu
This macro allows you to get the \r\nsubmenu of a page along with the synopsis of each link. You may specify an \r\ninteger to specify how many levels deep to traverse the page tree. \r\n

NOTES: The .synopsis_sub, .synopsis_summary, and .synopsis_title style \r\nsheet classes are tied to this macro. \r\n

^TopDropMenu;
Create a drop down menu of your top level navigation. \r\n\r\n

Example: ^TopDropMenu; \r\n

^T; or ^T(); - Top Level Menu (Vertical)
A vertical menu containing \r\nthe main pages of the site (aka the sub-pages from the home page). In addition, \r\nyou may configure this macro by specifying how many levels deep the menu should \r\ngo. By default it will show only the first level. To go three levels deep create \r\na macro like this ^T(3);. If you set the macro to \"0\" it will track the \r\nentire site tree. \r\n

^t; - Top Level Menu (Horizontal)
A vertical menu containing the \r\nmain pages of the site (aka the sub-pages from the home page). You can \r\noptionally specify a delimeter to be used between page names by using ^t(:--:);. \r\nThe default delimeter is ·. \r\n

^/; - System URL
The URL to the gateway script (example: \r\n/index.pl/). \r\n

^\\; - Page URL
The URL to the current page (example: \r\n/index.pl/pagename).

',1055005223,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (843,'WebGUI',12,'Bruker Makroer',1048550203,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (845,'WebGUI',12,'Style Makroer',1048550274,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (844,'WebGUI',12,'These macros have to do with users and logins. \r\n

^a; or ^a(); - My Account Link
A link to your account information. \r\nIn addition you can change the link text by creating a macro like this \r\n^a(\"Account Info\");. \r\n

NOTES: You can also use the special case ^a(linkonly); to return only \r\nthe URL to the account page and nothing more. Also, the .myAccountLink style \r\nsheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^AdminText();
Displays a small text message to a user who is in \r\nadmin mode. Example: ^AdminText(\"You are in admin mode!\"); \r\n

^AdminToggle; or ^AdminToggle();
Places a link on the page which is \r\nonly visible to content managers and adminstrators. The link toggles on/off \r\nadmin mode. You can optionally specify other messages to display like this: \r\n^AdminToggle(\"Edit On\",\"Edit Off\"); \r\n

^GroupText();
Displays a small text message to the user if they \r\nbelong to the specified group. Example: ^GroupText(\"Visitors\",\"You need an \r\naccount to do anything cool on this site!\"); \r\n

^L; or ^L(); - Login Box
A small login form. You can also configure \r\nthis macro. You can set the width of the login box like this ^L(20);. You can \r\nalso set the message displayed after the user is logged in like this ^L(20,Hi \r\n^a(^@;);. Click %here% if you wanna log out!) \r\n

NOTE: The .loginBox style sheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^LoginToggle; or ^LoginToggle();
Displays a \"Login\" or \"Logout\" \r\nmessage depending upon whether the user is logged in or not. You can optionally \r\nspecify other messages like this: ^LoginToggle(\"Click here to log in.\",\"Click \r\nhere to log out.\"); \r\n

^@; - Username
The username of the currently logged in user. \r\n

^#; - User ID
The user id of the currently logged in user.

',1048550254,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (846,'WebGUI',12,'These macros are mainly useful in maintaining styles in WebGUI. \r\n

^AdminBar;
Places the administrative tool bar on the page. This is \r\na required element in the \"body\" segment of the Style Manager. \r\n

^c; - Company Name
The name of your company specified in the \r\nsettings by your Administrator. \r\n

^e; - Company Email Address
The email address for your company \r\nspecified in the settings by your Administrator. \r\n

^Extras;
Returns the path to the WebGUI \"extras\" folder, which \r\ncontains things like WebGUI icons. \r\n

^PageTitle;
Displays the title of the current page. \r\n

NOTE: If you begin using admin functions or the indepth functions of \r\nany wobject, the page title will become a link that will quickly bring you back \r\nto the page. \r\n

^r; or ^r(); - Make Page Printable
Creates a link to remove the \r\nstyle from a page to make it printable. In addition, you can change the link \r\ntext by creating a macro like this ^r(\"Print Me!\");. \r\n

By default, when this link is clicked, the current page\'s style is replaced \r\nwith the \"Make Page Printable\" style in the Style Manager. However, that can be \r\noverridden by specifying the name of another style as the second parameter, like \r\nthis: ^r(\"Print!\",\"WebGUI\"); \r\n

NOTES: You can also use the special case ^r(linkonly); to return only \r\nthe URL to the make printable page and nothing more. Also, the \r\n.makePrintableLink style sheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^RootTitle;
Returns the title of the root of the current page. For \r\ninstance, the main root in WebGUI is the \"Home\" page. Many advanced sites have \r\nmany roots and thus need a way to display to the user which root they are in. \r\n

^u; - Company URL
The URL for your company specified in the \r\nsettings by your Administrator. \r\n

^?; - Search
Add a search box to the page. The search box is tied \r\nto WebGUI\'s built-in search engine. \r\n

NOTE: The .searchBox style sheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^-;
This is known as the separator macro. It must appear exactly \r\nonce in every style. Wherever it appears is where the content for any given page \r\nwill be put.

',1048550345,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (844,'WebGUI',12,'These macros have to do with users and logins. \r\n

^a; or ^a(); - My Account Link
A link to your account information. \r\nIn addition you can change the link text by creating a macro like this \r\n^a(\"Account Info\");. \r\n

NOTES: You can also use the special case ^a(linkonly); to return only \r\nthe URL to the account page and nothing more. Also, the .myAccountLink style \r\nsheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^AdminText();
Displays a small text message to a user who is in \r\nadmin mode. Example: ^AdminText(\"You are in admin mode!\"); \r\n

^AdminToggle; or ^AdminToggle();
Places a link on the page which is \r\nonly visible to content managers and adminstrators. The link toggles on/off \r\nadmin mode. You can optionally specify other messages to display like this: \r\n^AdminToggle(\"Edit On\",\"Edit Off\"); \r\n

^CanEditText();
Display a message to a user that can edit the \r\ncurrent page. \r\n

Example: ^CanEditText(^AdminToggle;); \r\n

^EditableToggle; or ^EditableToggle();
Exactly the same as \r\nAdminToggle, except that the toggle is only displayed if the user has the rights \r\nto edit the current page. \r\n

^GroupAdd();
Using this macro you can allow users to add themselves \r\nto a group. The first parameter is the name of the group this user should be \r\nadded to. The second parameter is a text string for the user to click on to add \r\nthemselves to this group. \r\n

NOTE: If the user is not logged in, or or already belongs to the \r\ngroup, or the group is not set to allow auto adds, then no link will be \r\ndisplayed. \r\n

^GroupDelete();
Using this macro you can allow users to delete \r\nthemselves from a group. The first parameter is the name of the group this user \r\nshould be deleted from. The second parameter is a text string for the user to \r\nclick on to delete themselves from this group. \r\n

NOTE: If the user is not logged in or the user does not belong to the \r\ngroup, or the group is not set to allow auto deletes, then no link will be \r\ndisplayed. \r\n

^GroupText();
Displays a small text message to the user if they \r\nbelong to the specified group. And you can specify an alternate message to those \r\nwho are not in the group. \r\n

Example: ^GroupText(\"Visitors\",\"You need an account to do anything \r\ncool on this site!\",\"We value our registered users!\"); \r\n

^L; or ^L(); - Login Box
A small login form. You can also configure \r\nthis macro. You can set the width of the login box like this ^L(20);. You can \r\nalso set the message displayed after the user is logged in like this ^L(20,Hi \r\n^a(^@;);. Click %here% if you wanna log out!) \r\n

NOTE: The .loginBox style sheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^LoginToggle; or ^LoginToggle();
Displays a \"Login\" or \"Logout\" \r\nmessage depending upon whether the user is logged in or not. You can optionally \r\nspecify other labels like this: ^LoginToggle(\"Click here to log in.\",\"Click here \r\nto log out.\");. You can also use the special case ^LoginToggle(linkonly); to \r\nreturn only the URL with no label. \r\n

^@; - Username
The username of the currently logged in user. \r\n

^#; - User ID
The user id of the currently logged in user.

',1055005262,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (846,'WebGUI',12,'These macros are mainly useful in maintaining styles in WebGUI. \r\n

^AdminBar;
Places the administrative tool bar on the page. This is \r\na required element in the \"body\" segment of the Style Manager. \r\n

^c; - Company Name
The name of your company specified in the \r\nsettings by your Administrator. \r\n

^e; - Company Email Address
The email address for your company \r\nspecified in the settings by your Administrator. \r\n

^Extras;
Returns the path to the WebGUI \"extras\" folder, which \r\ncontains things like WebGUI icons. \r\n

^LastModified; or ^LastModified();
Displays the date that the \r\ncurrent page was last modified based upon the wobjects on the page. The date is \r\ndefaultly displayed based upon the user\'s date preferences. Optionally, it can \r\ntake two parameters. The first is text to display before the date. The second is \r\na date format string (see the D (date) macro for details. \r\n

Example: ^LastModified(\"Updated: \",\"%c %D, %y\"); \r\n

^PageTitle;
Displays the title of the current page. \r\n

NOTE: If you begin using admin functions or the indepth functions of \r\nany wobject, the page title will become a link that will quickly bring you back \r\nto the page. \r\n

^r; or ^r(); - Make Page Printable
Creates a link to remove the \r\nstyle from a page to make it printable. In addition, you can change the link \r\ntext by creating a macro like this ^r(\"Print Me!\");. \r\n

By default, when this link is clicked, the current page\'s style is replaced \r\nwith the \"Make Page Printable\" style in the Style Manager. However, that can be \r\noverridden by specifying the name of another style as the second parameter, like \r\nthis: ^r(\"Print!\",\"WebGUI\"); \r\n

NOTES: You can also use the special case ^r(linkonly); to return only \r\nthe URL to the make printable page and nothing more. Also, the \r\n.makePrintableLink style sheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^RootTitle;
Returns the title of the root of the current page. For \r\ninstance, the main root in WebGUI is the \"Home\" page. Many advanced sites have \r\nmany roots and thus need a way to display to the user which root they are in. \r\n

^u; - Company URL
The URL for your company specified in the \r\nsettings by your Administrator. \r\n

^?; - Search
Add a search box to the page. The search box is tied \r\nto WebGUI\'s built-in search engine. \r\n

NOTE: The .searchBox style sheet class is tied to this macro. \r\n

^Spacer();
Create a spacer in your layout. Great for creating \r\nblocks of color with divs and tables. It takes two parameters, width and height. \r\n\r\n

Example: ^Spacer(\"100\",\"50\"); \r\n

^-;
This is known as the separator macro. It must appear exactly \r\nonce in every style. Wherever it appears is where the content for any given page \r\nwill be put.

',1055005292,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (887,'WebGUI',12,'Midas (Mozilla 1.3+)',1048550377,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (744,'WebGUI',10,'Hvad så?',1046864856,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (743,'WebGUI',10,'Du må angive en valid email adresse for jeg kan forsøge at genskabe dit kodeord.',1046864836,NULL); @@ -10448,7 +10448,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (615,'WebGUI',8,'I gruppi sono usati per suddiv INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'Item',8,'Come gli articoli, gli Item sono il coltellino svizzero del sistema. La maggior parte di contenuti statici possono essere aggiunti mediante il widget Item, anche se gli item sono usati per contenuti più piccoli che non gli articoli.\r\n

\r\nTemplate
\r\nScegli un layout per questo contenuto?\r\n

\r\nURL del Link
\r\nQuesta URL sarà attaccata al titolo di questo Item.\r\n

\r\nEsempio: http://www.google.com\r\n

\r\nAllegato
\r\nSe vuoi allegare un file di un word processor , un file zip , o qualsiasi altro file da scaricare per gli utenti, sceglilo dal tuo hard disk.\r\n\r\n',1046633095,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (612,'WebGUI',8,'Non c\'è quasi mai l\'esigenza di cancellare un utente. Se vuoi inibire un utente, cambiagli semplicemente la password. Se vuoi veramente cancellare un utente, tieni a mente che ci sono delle conseguenze. Se cancelli un utente, tutto il contenuto che ha aggiunto mediante i wobjects (come i forum o i contributi degli utenti) rimarrà sul sito. D\'altro canto, se altri utenti provano a visitare il profilo dell\'utente cancellato riceveranno un messaggio d\'errore. Anche se l\'utente è di nuovo benvenuto sul sito, non c\'è modo di ridargli l\'accesso ai propri vecchi contenuti, eccetto che modificando manualmente l\'utente nella tabella users del database.\r\n

Come con ogni operazione di cancellazione, sei chiamato a rispondere ad una conferma per procedere con la cancellazione. Se rispondi di sì, la cancellazione procederà e non ci sarà possibilità di recuperare i dati. Se rispondi di no sarai riportato alla schermata precedente.\r\n\r\n.',1046633062,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (608,'WebGUI',8,'Cancellare una pagina può creare un grande danno se sei insicuro di quello che stai facendo. Quando cancelli una pagina cancelli anche tutto il suo contenuto (articoli, wobject, et..), tutte le sotto-pagine connesse a questa, e tutto il loro contenuto. Sii sicuro di aver già mosso tutto il contenuto che vuoi conservare prima di cancellare una pagina.\r\n

\r\nCome con ogni operazione di cancellazione, sei chiamato a rispondere ad una conferma per procedere con la cancellazione. Se rispondi di sì, la cancellazione procederà e non ci sarà possibilità di recuperare i dati. Se rispondi di no sarai riportato alla schermata precedente.',1046633024,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (606,'WebGUI',8,'Pensa alle pagine come a contenitori per i contenuti. Per esempio, se vuoi scrivere una lettera all\'editore del tuo settimanale preferito prendi un foglio (o apri un word processor) e cominci a riempirlo dei tuoi pensieri. Lo stesso vale per il C.M.S.. Crea una pagina, quindi aggiungi i tuoi contenuti alla pagina.\r\n

\r\nTitolo
\r\nIl titolo della pagina è quello che gli utenti useranno per navigare attraverso il tuo sito. I titoli dovrebbero essere descrittivi, ma non molto lunghi.\r\n

\r\nTitolo nel Menu
\r\nUn titolo più breve o diverso che compare nel menù di navigazione. Se non\r\nviene inserito sarò usato il Titolo .

Nascondi dalla navigazione
\r\nSeleziona Si per nascondere dal menù di navigazione.

NOTA:
\r\nla pagina sarà non sarà nascosta nella mappa del sito e nell\'albero di\r\nnavigazione, solo nel menù.

Apri in una nuova finestra?
\r\nSeleziona Si per aprire la pagina in una nuova finestra. Spesso è usata assieme\r\nal parametro Redireziona URL.\r\n

\r\nURL della pagina
\r\nQuando crei una pagina una URL per la pagina viene generata basandosi sul titolo della pagina. Se non ti piace l\'URL scelto, puoi cambiarlo\r\nqui.\r\n

Redireziona URL
\r\nQuando questa pagina viene visitata l\'utente viene reindirizzato all\'indirizzo\r\nqui specificato.\r\n

NOTA: le redirezioni sono disabilitate qunado si è in modalità admin,\r\nper consentire una più agevole modifica delle pagine.

\r\n

Lingua
\r\nSeleziona il linguaggio di default per questa pagina. Tutti i messaggi di WebGUI\r\nsaranno generati nel linguaggio selezionato.\r\n

\r\nTemplate
\r\nPer default, il C.M.S.ha una grande area di contenuto dove piazzare wobjects. Invece, specificando un altro template diverso dal default puoi suddividere l\'area del contenuto in ulteriori sezioni.

Descrizione
\r\nUna breve descrizione della pagina, si usa per fornire contenuti per i meta tags\r\ne per la mappa del sito.\r\n\r\n

\r\nMeta Tags
\r\nI Meta tags sono usati da alcuni motori di ricerca per associare delle parole chiave ad una particolare pagina. Puoi usare\r\nWebopen Meta Tag Builder che ti aiuterà a costruire dei meta tags se non l\'hai mai fatto prima.\r\n

\r\nUtenti Avanzati: Se avete altre cose (come JavaScript) che normalmente mettereste nel tag\r\npotete metterle qui.\r\n

\r\nUsa i meta tags di default?
\r\nSe non vuoi specificare tuoi meta tags, il C.M.S. può generarli basandosi sul titolo della pagina e sul nome dell\'azienda. Spunta questa box per abilitare i meta tags generati dal\r\nC.M.S..\r\n

\r\nStile
\r\nPer default, quando crei una pagina, eredita alcune caratteristiche dalla pagina genitore. Una di queste caratteristiche è lo stile. Scegli dalla lista degli stili se vuoi cambiare l\'aspetto di questa pagina. Vedi Aggiungi Stile per maggiori dettagli.\r\n

\r\nSe spunti la box sottostante il pull-down menu dello stile, tutte le pagine figlie di questa pagina prenderanno lo stile selezionato per questa pagina.\r\n

\r\nData di inizio
\r\nIn che data vuoi che questa pagina appaia sul sito? Le date sono nel formato\r\namericano MM/GG/AAAA. Puoi usare un wizard JavaScript per selezionare la data da\r\nun calendario cliccando su imposta la data. 
\r\n
\r\nData di fine
\r\nIn che data vuoi che questa pagina venga oscurato dal sito? Dopo tale data solo\r\ni content manager potranno visualizzare la pagina.\r\n

\r\nPropietario
\r\nIl proprietario di una pagina è solitamente chi l\'ha creata.

Chi può visualizzare?
\r\nSeleziona il gruppo che può visualizzare la pagina. Se vuoi che possa essere\r\nvisualizzata sia dai visitatori che dagli utenti registrati,  seleziona il\r\ngruppo "Everybody"\r\n

\r\nChi può modificare?
\r\nSeleziona il gruppo che può modificare la pagina.\r\n

\r\nPuoi scegliere come opzione di dare questi privilegi a tutte le pagine sotto questa.

Prossima\r\nAzione?
\r\nSe lasci l\'opzione al valore di default sarai rediretto alla nuova pagina appena\r\ncreata.\r\n',1054311994,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (606,'WebGUI',8,'Pensa alle pagine come a contenitori per i contenuti. Per esempio, se vuoi scrivere una lettera all\'editore del tuo settimanale preferito prendi un foglio (o apri un word processor) e cominci a riempirlo dei tuoi pensieri. Lo stesso vale per il C.M.S.. Crea una pagina, quindi aggiungi i tuoi contenuti alla pagina.\r\n

\r\nTitolo
\r\nIl titolo della pagina è quello che gli utenti useranno per navigare attraverso il tuo sito. I titoli dovrebbero essere descrittivi, ma non molto lunghi.\r\n

\r\nTitolo nel Menu
\r\nUn titolo più breve o diverso che compare nel menù di navigazione. Se non\r\nviene inserito sarò usato il Titolo .\r\n

\r\nURL della pagina
\r\nQuando crei una pagina una URL per la pagina viene generata basandosi sul titolo della pagina. Se non ti piace l\'URL scelto, puoi cambiarlo\r\nqui.\r\n

Redireziona URL
\r\nQuando questa pagina viene visitata l\'utente viene reindirizzato all\'indirizzo\r\nqui specificato.\r\n

NOTA: le redirezioni sono disabilitate qunado si è in modalità admin,\r\nper consentire una più agevole modifica delle pagine.

\r\n

Nascondi dalla navigazione
\r\nSeleziona Si per nascondere dal menù di navigazione.

NOTA:
\r\nla pagina sarà non sarà nascosta nella mappa del sito e nell\'albero di\r\nnavigazione, solo nel menù.

Apri in una nuova finestra?
\r\nSeleziona Si per aprire la pagina in una nuova finestra. Spesso è usata assieme\r\nal parametro Redireziona URL.\r\n

Lingua
\r\nSeleziona il linguaggio di default per questa pagina. Tutti i messaggi di WebGUI\r\nsaranno generati nel linguaggio selezionato.\r\n

Cache Timeout
\r\nLa quantità di tempo che questa pagina rimarrà in cache per i  registered\r\nusers.\r\n

Cache Timeout (Visitors)
\r\nLa quantità di tempo che questa pagina rimarrà in cache per i visitors.\r\n

NOTA: il Page caching è disponibile solo se il tuo amministratore ha\r\ninstallato il modulo Perl  Cache::FileCache. Usando il page caching puoi\r\nmigliorare la performance del sito del 1000%.

\r\n

\r\nTemplate
\r\nPer default, il C.M.S.ha una grande area di contenuto dove piazzare wobjects. Invece, specificando un altro template diverso dal default puoi suddividere l\'area del contenuto in ulteriori sezioni.

Descrizione
\r\nUna breve descrizione della pagina, si usa per fornire contenuti per i meta tags\r\ne per la mappa del sito.\r\n\r\n

\r\nMeta Tags
\r\nI Meta tags sono usati da alcuni motori di ricerca per associare delle parole chiave ad una particolare pagina. Puoi usare\r\nWebopen Meta Tag Builder che ti aiuterà a costruire dei meta tags se non l\'hai mai fatto prima.\r\n

\r\nUtenti Avanzati: Se avete altre cose (come JavaScript) che normalmente mettereste nel tag\r\npotete metterle qui.\r\n

\r\nUsa i meta tags di default?
\r\nSe non vuoi specificare tuoi meta tags, il C.M.S. può generarli basandosi sul titolo della pagina e sul nome dell\'azienda. Spunta questa box per abilitare i meta tags generati dal\r\nC.M.S..\r\n

\r\nStile
\r\nPer default, quando crei una pagina, eredita alcune caratteristiche dalla pagina genitore. Una di queste caratteristiche è lo stile. Scegli dalla lista degli stili se vuoi cambiare l\'aspetto di questa pagina. Vedi Aggiungi Stile per maggiori dettagli.\r\n

\r\nSe spunti la box sottostante il pull-down menu dello stile, tutte le pagine figlie di questa pagina prenderanno lo stile selezionato per questa pagina.\r\n

\r\nData di inizio
\r\nIn che data vuoi che questa pagina appaia sul sito? Le date sono nel formato\r\namericano MM/GG/AAAA. Puoi usare un wizard JavaScript per selezionare la data da\r\nun calendario cliccando su imposta la data. 
\r\n
\r\nData di fine
\r\nIn che data vuoi che questa pagina venga oscurato dal sito? Dopo tale data solo\r\ni content manager potranno visualizzare la pagina.\r\n

\r\nPropietario
\r\nIl proprietario di una pagina è solitamente chi l\'ha creata. Questo utente ha i\r\nprivilegi per modificare e vedere la pagina\r\n

\r\nNota: Il proprietario può essere cambiato solo da un amministratore.

Chi può visualizzare?
\r\nSeleziona il gruppo che può visualizzare la pagina. Se vuoi che possa essere\r\nvisualizzata sia dai visitatori che dagli utenti registrati,  seleziona il\r\ngruppo "Everybody"\r\n

\r\nChi può modificare?
\r\nSeleziona il gruppo che può modificare la pagina.\r\n

\r\nPuoi scegliere come opzione di dare questi privilegi a tutte le pagine sotto questa.

Prossima\r\nAzione?
\r\nSe lasci l\'opzione al valore di default sarai rediretto alla nuova pagina appena\r\ncreata.\r\n',1056805592,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'Poll',8,'I sondaggi possono essere usati per testare i gusti dei tuoi utenti su vari argomenti.\r\n

\r\n\r\nAttivo
\r\nSe questo box é selezionato gli utenti potranno votare. Altrimenti saranno in grado solo di visualizzare i risultati del sondaggio.\r\n

\r\nChi può votare?
\r\nScegli un gruppo che può votare in questo sondaggio.\r\n

\r\n

Karma Per Voto
\r\nQuanto karma deve essere assegnato all\'utente quando vota?

\r\n\r\nLarghezza del grafico
\r\nLa larghezza del grafico dei risultati del sondaggio. La larghezza é misurata in pixel.\r\n

\r\nDomanda
\r\nQual\'é la domanda che vorresti fare agli utenti?\r\n

\r\nRisposte
\r\nInserisci le possibili risposte alla tua domanda. Inserisci una sola risposta per linea. I sondaggi sono capaci di gestire fino a 20 risposte possibili.\r\n

\r\n

Randomizza le risposte
\r\nPer essere certi che l\'ordine delle risposte non influenzi gli utenti è spesso utile prensentarle in ordine casuale ogni volta che vengono mostrate. Seleziona SI per abilitare l\'opzione

\r\n\r\n\r\nAzzera i voti.
\r\nAzzera i voti per questo sondaggio.\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n',1054311284,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (9,'WobjectProxy',8,'Sostituisci descrizione?',1054238594,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (8,'WobjectProxy',8,'Sostituisci il settaggio \"visualizza titolo\"?',1054238386,NULL); @@ -10474,10 +10474,10 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (637,'WebGUI',8,'Nome
\r\nIl nome del INSERT INTO international VALUES (618,'WebGUI',8,'\r\nSMTP Server
\r\nQuesto é l\'indirizzo del tuo mail server locale. E\' necessario per tutte le funzionalità che coinvolgono la posta internet (come la funzione di recupero password).

\r\n\r\nEmail footer
\r\nQuesto footer sarà processato per le macro e allegato ad ogni email inviata da questa istanza di WebGUI.\r\n

\r\nAvverti quando c\'è un nuovo utente?
\r\nQualcuno deve essere avvisato se un nuovo utente si registra anonimamente?\r\n

\r\nGruppo da avvertire quando c\'è un nuovo utente?
\r\nQuale gruppo deve essere avvisato se un nuovo utente si registra anonimamente?\r\n

\r\n\r\n',1046556120,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (617,'WebGUI',8,'I Settaggi sono opzioni che ti consentono di aggiustare il C.M.S. per i tuoi particolari bisogni.\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\nModifica informazioni sull\'azienda
\r\nInformazioni specifiche riguardo l\'azienda o l\'individuo che controlla questa installazione del C.M.S. .\r\n

\r\n\r\nModifica i settaggi dei contenuti
\r\nSettaggi correlati a contenuti e alla loro gestione.\r\n

\r\n\r\nModifica i settaggi della messaggistica
\r\nSettaggi per le email e le funzioni relative alla messaggistica.\r\n

\r\n\r\nModifica settaggi vari
\r\nTutto il resto.\r\n\r\nModifica i settaggi del profilo
\r\nDefinisce come appaioni i profili degli utenti e cosa gli utenti hanno i privilegi di modificare

\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\nModifica i settaggi per gli utenti
\r\nQuesti settaggi riguardano la identificazione degli utenti e il login, etc.\r\n

\r\n\r\n',1046555813,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (613,'WebGUI',8,'Gli utenti nel sistema sono gli account ai quali é concesso fare determinate cose. Ci sono due utenti di default: Admin e Visitor.\r\n

\r\n\r\nAdmin
\r\nAdmin é esattamente quello che ti aspetti. E\' un utente con privilegi illimitati nell\'ambiente. Se qualcosa può essere fatto, questo utente ha i diritti per farlo.\r\n

\r\n\r\nVisitor
\r\nVisitor é esattamente l\'opposto di Admin. Visitor non ha nessun diritto. Per default qualsiasi utente non loggato é visto come utente Visitor.\r\n

\r\n\r\nAggiungi un nuovo utente.
\r\nClicca qui per andare allo schermo di aggiunta utente.\r\n

\r\n\r\nCerca
\r\nPuoi cercare gli utenti basandoti sullo username o sull\'indirizzo email. Puoi anche fare delle ricerche parziali se preferisci.',1046555073,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (632,'WebGUI',8,'Puoi aggiungere wobject selezionando Aggiungi contenuto dal menu in alto a sinistra. Puoi poi editarlo cliccando sul bottone \"Modifica\" che appare proprio sopra l\'istanza di ogni wobject particolare.\r\n

Quasi tutti wobject condividono alcune proprietà:

\r\n

Wobject ID
\r\nL\'identificatore unico che WebGUI  usa per tracciare il wobject. Gli utenti\r\nnormali probabilmente non hanno bisogno di questo parametro, ma qualche utente\r\navanzato può averne bisogno per esempio applicazioni di SQL Reports.

\r\n

Titolo
\r\nQual\'é il titolo di questo articolo? Anche se non vuoi che il titolo appaia, é\r\nuna buona idea dare un titolo ai tuoi contenuti, così quando questi saranno\r\ncopiati negli appunti avranno un nome.
\r\n
\r\nVisualizza il titolo?
\r\nVuoi visualizzare il titolo? In alcuni siti visualizzare il titolo non è necessario.
\r\n
\r\nProcessa le macro?
\r\nVuoi processare le macro nel contenuto di questo wobject? A volte vorrai attivare l\'interpretazione delle macro. Deselezionando questo\r\nbox non processerà le macro e sarà velocizzata l\'esecuzione della pagina.
\r\n
\r\nPosizione nel template
\r\nLe posizioni nel template variano da 0 (zero) a qualsiasi numero. Quante ne sono disponibili dipende dal template associato a questa pagina. Il template di default ha solo una posizione nel template, altri possono averne di più. Selezionando una posizione nel template, stai specificando dove questo wobject sarà posizionato nella struttura del template.\r\n
\r\n
\r\nData di inizio
\r\nIn che data vuoi che questo articolo appaia sul sito? Le date sono nel formato\r\namericano MM/GG/AAAA. Puoi usare un wizard JavaScript per selezionare la data da\r\nun calendario cliccando su imposta la data. Per default la data di inizio\r\né posta a 01/01/2000.
\r\n
\r\nData di fine
\r\nIn che data vuoi che questo articolo venga rimosso dal sito? Per default la data\r\ndi fine é posta a 100 anni nel futuro, 01/01/2100.
\r\n
\r\nDescrizione
\r\nUna area di contenutonella quale puoi mettere quanto contenuto ti pare. Per esempio, perfino prima di una FAQ c\'è di solito un paragrafo che descrive che cosa è contenuto in essa.\r\n
\r\n
\r\n

\r\n',1049641620,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (632,'WebGUI',8,'Puoi aggiungere wobject selezionando Aggiungi contenuto dal menu in alto a sinistra. Puoi poi editarlo cliccando sul bottone \"Modifica\" che appare proprio sopra l\'istanza di ogni wobject particolare.\r\n

Quasi tutti wobject condividono alcune proprietà:

\r\n

Wobject ID
\r\nL\'identificatore unico che WebGUI  usa per tracciare il wobject. Gli utenti\r\nnormali probabilmente non hanno bisogno di questo parametro, ma qualche utente\r\navanzato può averne bisogno per esempio applicazioni di SQL Reports.

\r\n

Titolo
\r\nQual\'é il titolo di questo articolo? Anche se non vuoi che il titolo appaia, é\r\nuna buona idea dare un titolo ai tuoi contenuti, così quando questi saranno\r\ncopiati negli appunti avranno un nome.\r\n

\r\n

Nota: dovresti sempre specificare un titolo anche se non vuoi visualizzarlo.\r\nquesto perchè il titolo viene mostrato negli appunti e nel cestino e ti sarà\r\nsicuramente utile per distinguere un wobject da un altro.
\r\n
\r\nVisualizza il titolo?
\r\nVuoi visualizzare il titolo? In alcuni siti visualizzare il titolo non è necessario.
\r\n
\r\nProcessa le macro?
\r\nVuoi processare le macro nel contenuto di questo wobject? A volte vorrai attivare l\'interpretazione delle macro. Deselezionando questo\r\nbox non processerà le macro e sarà velocizzata l\'esecuzione della pagina.
\r\n
\r\nPosizione nel template
\r\nLe posizioni nel template variano da 0 (zero) a qualsiasi numero. Quante ne sono disponibili dipende dal template associato a questa pagina. Il template di default ha solo una posizione nel template, altri possono averne di più. Selezionando una posizione nel template, stai specificando dove questo wobject sarà posizionato nella struttura del template.\r\n
\r\n
\r\nData di inizio
\r\nIn che data vuoi che questo articolo appaia sul sito? Le date sono nel formato\r\namericano MM/GG/AAAA. Puoi usare un wizard JavaScript per selezionare la data da\r\nun calendario cliccando su imposta la data. Prima di questa data i\r\ncontenuti saranno visibili solo ai content managers.
\r\n
\r\nData di fine
\r\nIn che data vuoi che questo articolo venga rimosso dal sito? Dopo questa\r\ndata  i contenuti  saranno visibili solo ai content managers.\r\n

\r\n

Proprietario
\r\nIl proprietario di un  wobject è solitamente la persona che lo ha creato.\r\nQuesto utente ha tutti i privilegi per vedere e modificare il wobject, finchè i\r\nprivilegi per modificare la pagina su cui appare  il wobject non vengono\r\nportati via.\r\n

NOTA: il proprietario può essere modificato solo dall\'amministratore.\r\n

Chi può visualizzare?
\r\nScegli quale gruppo può visualizzare questo wobject. Se desideri che possano\r\nvederlo sia i visitatori che gli utenti registrati scegli il gruppo "Everybody".\r\n

Chi può modificare?
\r\nScegli quale gruppo può modificare questo wobject. il gruppo che può\r\nmodificare può sempre anche visualizzare  il wobject.
\r\n
\r\nDescrizione
\r\nUna area di contenuto nella quale puoi mettere quanto contenuto ti pare. Per esempio, perfino prima di una FAQ c\'è di solito un paragrafo che descrive che cosa è contenuto in essa.\r\n
\r\n',1056807423,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (639,'WebGUI',8,'Nome Template
\r\nDai un nome descrittivo al template, così lo riconoscerai quando vorrai applicarlo ad una pagina.\r\n

\r\nNamespace
\r\nChe tipo di template è questo?\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\nTemplate
\r\nCrea il tuo template inserendo i comandi di template, le macro di variabile e il codice.\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\nNota:\r\nNon devi mai modificare i template di default che trovi nella distribuzione di WebGUI, perchè possono variare con ogni realise per introdurre nuove funzioni. Devi fare una copia del template che ti interessa e modificare quello.\r\n',1046550619,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'SiteMap',8,'Le mappe del sito sono usate per aggiungere un ulteriore ausilio nella navigazione. Puoi aggiungere una mappa del sito tradizionale che visualizzi una vista gerarchica di tutte le pagine nel sito. D\'altra parte, puoi usare le mappe del sito per dare un ausilio di navigazione a certi livelli nel sito.\r\n

\r\n\r\nTemplate
\r\nSeleziona un layout per questa mappa.\r\n

\r\nParti Da
\r\nSeleziona la pagina da cui vuoi far iniziare la mappa.\r\n

\r\nPartire da questo Livello?
\r\nQuanti livelli di profondità della navigazione deve mostrare la mappa? Se è specificato 0(zero) mostrerà tutti i livelli esistenti.\r\n

\r\n\r\nRientro
\r\nDi quanti caratteri deve rientrare ogni livello?

\r\n\r\n',1046550282,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'SQLReport',8,'I report SQL sono forse il più potente tra i wobject. Consentono all\'utente di eseguire query su qualsiasi database al quale abbia accesso. Questo é utile ad esempio per estrarre dati dal tuo database degli account o per creare dei sommari di\r\ntutti i forum di discussione nel sito.

\r\n\r\nPreprocessa le macro sulla quesry?
\r\nVuoi che vengano processate le macro del C.M.S.? Seleziona questo box.

Debug?
\r\nSeleziona questo box se vuoi visualizzare il debugging e i messaggi di\r\nerrore nella pagina.

Query
\r\nQuesta é una query SQL standard. Puoi rendere più dinamiche le tue query\r\nutilizzando la macro ^FormParam(); \r\n

\r\n\r\nReport Template
\r\nScrivi qui il codice per generare il report. normalmente userai delle tabelle HTML per generarlo. Sotto é incluso un esempio. Se lasci questo campo in bianco il template sarà generato in base al risultato della query.\r\n

\r\n\r\nCi sono delle macro speciali per generare report SQL. Sono: ^-;, ^0;, ^1;, ^2;, ^3;, etc. Queste macro saranno processate comunque, a prescindere dal fatto che tu abbia deselezionato la box processa macro. La macro ^- rappresenta i punti di split nel documento dove il report comincia e finisce di fare il loop. Le macro numeriche rappresentano i dati ritornati dalla\r\nquery. C\'è una macro aggiuntiva ^rownum; che conta le righe della query\r\npartendo da 1 per usarla dove le linee del\'output devono essere numerate.

\r\n\r\nDSN
\r\nData Source Name é l\'identificatore univoco che il linguaggio PERL usa per descrivere la locazione del tuo database. La sintassi é DBI:[driver]:[database name]:[host]. \r\n

\r\n\r\nEsempio: DBI:mysql:WebGUI:localhost\r\n

\r\n\r\nUtente Database\r\nLo username che usi per collegarti al DSN.\r\n

\r\n\r\nPassword Database\r\nLa password che usi pe rcollegarti al DSN.\r\n

\r\n\r\nPagina dopo\r\nQuante righe vuoi che siano visualizzate prima di dividere il risultato in pagine separate? In altre parole, quante righe vuoi che siano visualizzate per pagina?\r\n

\r\n\r\nConverti gli a capo?\r\nVuoi convertire gli a capo nei dati del risultato in break HTML (<br>).\r\n',1046549982,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'SQLReport',8,'I report SQL sono forse il più potente tra i wobject. Consentono all\'utente di eseguire query su qualsiasi database al quale abbia accesso. Questo é utile ad esempio per estrarre dati dal tuo database degli account o per creare dei sommari di\r\ntutti i forum di discussione nel sito.

\r\n\r\nPreprocessa le macro sulla quesry?
\r\nVuoi che vengano processate le macro del C.M.S.? Seleziona questo box.

Debug?
\r\nSeleziona questo box se vuoi visualizzare il debugging e i messaggi di\r\nerrore nella pagina.

Query
\r\nQuesta é una query SQL standard. Puoi rendere più dinamiche le tue query\r\nutilizzando la macro ^FormParam(); \r\n

\r\n\r\nReport Template
\r\nScrivi qui il codice per generare il report. normalmente userai delle tabelle HTML per generarlo. Sotto é incluso un esempio. Se lasci questo campo in bianco il template sarà generato in base al risultato della query.\r\n

\r\n\r\nCi sono delle macro speciali per generare report SQL. Sono: ^-;, ^0;, ^1;, ^2;, ^3;, etc. Queste macro saranno processate comunque, a prescindere dal fatto che tu abbia deselezionato la box processa macro. La macro ^- rappresenta i punti di split nel documento dove il report comincia e finisce di fare il loop. Le macro numeriche rappresentano i dati ritornati dalla\r\nquery. C\'è una macro aggiuntiva ^rownum; che conta le righe della query\r\npartendo da 1 per usarla dove le linee del\'output devono essere numerate. \r\n\r\n

Database Link
\r\nL\'amministratore può configurare database comuni sui quali puoi eseguire report\r\nSQL, senza dover conoscere o inserire DNS, Username e Password. Se un database\r\nè selezionato da questa lista i campi  DNS, Username e Password saranno\r\nignorati.

\r\n

Se il database che devi usare non è configurato come un Database Link, puoi\r\ninserire DSN, User, e Password.\r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\nDSN
\r\nData Source Name é l\'identificatore univoco che il linguaggio PERL usa per descrivere la locazione del tuo database. La sintassi é DBI:[driver]:[database name]:[host]. \r\n

\r\n\r\nEsempio: DBI:mysql:WebGUI:localhost\r\n

\r\n\r\nUtente Database\r\nLo username che usi per collegarti al DSN.\r\n

\r\n\r\nPassword Database\r\nLa password che usi pe rcollegarti al DSN.\r\n

\r\n\r\nPagina dopo\r\nQuante righe vuoi che siano visualizzate prima di dividere il risultato in pagine separate? In altre parole, quante righe vuoi che siano visualizzate per pagina?\r\n

\r\n\r\nConverti gli a capo?\r\nVuoi convertire gli a capo nei dati del risultato in break HTML (<br>).\r\n',1056804917,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (43,'Product',8,'Le specifiche sono le caratteristiche tecniche del prodotto.

\r\n\r\nTipo della specifica
\r\n\r\nil tipo di specifica. Per esempio altezza, larghezza, o colore. Puoi selezionarne una già inserita nel sistema per un altro prodotto, oppure inserirne una nuova.

\r\n\r\nSpecifica
\r\n\r\nil valore della specifica. Per esempio, se hai scelto altezza come tipo dovrai inserire un valore numerico come \"12\".

\r\n\r\nUnità
\r\n\r\nLa unità di misura per questa specifica. Per esempio, se hai scelto altezza come tipo, probabilmente dovrebbe essere \"centimetri\".

\r\n\r\nAggiungi una nuova specifica?
\r\n\r\nSe vuoi aggiungere una ulteriore specifica, seleziona \"Si\".\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n',1046548417,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (39,'Product',8,'Il C.M.S. comprende un sistema di gestione catalogo prodotti che consente di pubblicare facilmente e velocemente i tuoi prodotti e servizi. \r\n

\r\n

Template
\r\nSeleziona un layout per questo prodotto.

\r\n\r\nPrezzo
\r\nIl prezzo di questo prodotto. Se preferisci puoi lasciarlo vuoto oppure inserire un messaggio tipo: contattaci per informazioni.

\r\n\r\nCodice Prodotto
\r\n\r\nIl codice del prodotto, o un identificativo del prodotto.

\r\n\r\nImmagine Prodotto 1
\r\n\r\nUna immagine di questo prodotto.

\r\n\r\nImmagine Prodotto 2
\r\n\r\nUna immagine di questo prodotto.

\r\n\r\nImmagine Prodotto 3
\r\n\r\nUna immagine di questo prodotto.

\r\n

Brochure
\r\nLa brochure per questo prodotto.\r\n

Manuale
\r\nIl manuale di utilizzo per questo prodotto.\r\n

Garanzia
\r\nLa garanzia per questo prodotto.

\r\n',1046548367,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'MessageBoard',8,'I Forum di discussione sono un modo efficace di aggiungere un senso di comunità ad ogni sito internet. Molte aziende usano i Forum internamente per collaborare sui progetti.\r\n

\r\nMessaggi per pagina
\r\nQuando un visitatore arriva per la prima volta su un Forum, gli sarà presentata una lista di tutti i soggetti (a.k.a. threads) del Forum. Se un Forum diventa popolare, il numero dei threads aumenterà rapidamente. L\'attributo messaggi per pagina ti consente di specificare il numero di soggetti per ogni pagina.\r\n

Main Template
\r\nSeleziona un layout visualizzazione principale di questo forum.

\r\n

Filtra i messaggi
\r\nSeleziona il livello di filtraggio da applicare ai messaggi del forum.\r\n

\r\nChi può postare?
\r\nQuale gruppo può postare su questo Forum?\r\n

\r\nModifica Timeout
\r\nQuesto settaggio specifica per quanto tempo un utente avrà la possibilità di modificare il proprio messaggio. Il Timeout é misurato in ore.\r\n

\r\nNota: Non settare questo limite troppo alto. Una delle cose più interessanti dei Forum é che sono una registrazione accurata di una discussione. Se consenti di modificare i messaggi per molto tempo, l\'utente avrà la possibilità di cambiare idea molto tempo dopo che il pensiero originale era stato espresso.\r\n\r\n\r\n 

\r\n

Karma Per Post
\r\nQuanto karma deve essere assegnato all\'utente quando posta  su questa\r\ndiscussione?

\r\n

\r\nChi può moderare?
\r\nQuale gruppo può moderare su questo Forum?

\r\n

Tipo di moderazione?
\r\nPuoi selezionare il tipo di moderazione che preferisci. Dopo-il-fatto\r\nsignifica che quando un utente invia un messaggio questo viene pubblicato\r\nimmediatamente. Preventiva significa che un moderatore deve visionare ed\r\napprovare i messaggi prima che essi siano resi pubblicamente visibili. Gli\r\navvisi per i nuovi messaggi sono automaticamente visualizzati nel WebGUI Inbox\r\ndel moderatore.\r\n

Nota: In entrambi i tipi di moderazione il moderatore può sempre\r\nmodificare o cancellare i messaggi inviati.

\r\n

Aggiungi data di modifica nei post?
\r\nVuoi aggiungere la data di modifica nei messaggi così da sapere chi ha modificato un messaggio e quando?\r\n',1048067886,NULL); @@ -10515,7 +10515,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (625,'WebGUI',8,'Carica tutte le immagini che p INSERT INTO international VALUES (635,'WebGUI',8,'I Package sono gruppi di pagine e widgets che sono predefinite per essere sviluppate insieme. Un package manager può sentire l\'esigenza di creare varie pagine con un forum, una FAQ, un sondaggio perché questa operazione viene eseguita spesso. I Packages sono definiti per diminuire il disturbo di azioni ripetitive.\r\n

\r\nUn package che la gente spesso crea é un package pagina/articolo. Spesso quando aggiungi una pagina vuoi anche aggiungere un articolo ad essa. Invece di fare queste operazioni una alla volta, creare la pagina, andare a quella pagina, e aggiungere l\'articolo alla pagina, troverai più veloce creare un package che faccia tutte queste cose in un colpo solo.',1046124350,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (629,'WebGUI',8,'Usa Appunti Condivisi?
\r\nUtilizza un unico sistema di appunti condiviso da tutti gli utenti. Di default\r\ngli appunti sono separati per ogni utente.\r\n

Usa Cestino Condiviso?
\r\nUtilizza un unico cestino condiviso da tutti gli utenti. Di default il cestino\r\nè separato per ogni utente.

\r\n

Se è \"proxied\", usa il client IP address reale?
\r\nSe è abilitato e se la variabile  HTTP_X_FORWARDED_FOR è presente, il suo\r\nvalore sarà utilizzato al posto del REMOTE_ADDRESS nell\'IP address del Browser\r\nclient. Questo è richiesto per i gruppi basati su IP per funzionare\r\ncorrettamente nelle architetture di sistema reverse-proxied e load-balanced. In\r\nquesti ambienti tutte le richieste appariranno come se arrivassero dallo stesso\r\nhost, cioè il proxy server. Se non sei sicuro di aver bisogno di  questo\r\nsettaggio, probabilmente dovresti lasciarlo disabilitato.\r\n

Prevent Proxy Caching
\r\nAlcune Aziende hanno proxy ser\r\nvers che causano problemi al C.M.S. . Se hai riscontrato dei problemi, e hai un proxy server, potresti impostare il parametro su Sì. Ricorda che una\r\nvolta attivata questa opzione gli URL del C.M.S. non saranno più user friendly.\r\n

Mostra debugging?
\r\nMostra le informazioni di debugging  negli output di WebGUI. Questa\r\nfunzione è molto utile per gli sviluppatori, ma può essere interessante anche\r\nper gli admin per risolvere eventuali problemi.\r\n

Traccia le statistiche delle pagine?
\r\nWebGUI può tracciare alcune informazioni statistiche per il tuo sito. Comunque\r\nquesta caratteristica aggiungerà un pò di lavoro extra al processore del\r\nserver e farà crescere le dimensioni del database più velocemente. Abilitò\r\nquesta funzione solo se non hai un programma statistico per il web esterno.

',1054481049,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (633,'WebGUI',8,'I roots sono le pagine principali su cui si sviluppa il sito. La prima e la più importante root è la \"Home\" page. Molti non hanno necessità di aggiungere una nuova root, ma a qualcuno potrebbe servire. Può essere necessario creare nuove root per diverse ragioni, ad esempio per un sito in due lingue sarà necessario creare due root: italiano e inglese.',1046123933,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (634,'WebGUI',8,'Home Page di Default
\r\nMolti piccoli siti non hanno una vera home page, preferiscono invece usare una pagina interna come \"Chi Siamo\" or \"Azienda\" come home page. Per questo motivo, puoi settare come pagina di default del tuo sito site qualsiasi pagina del sito stesso. Sarà la pagina che visualizzeranno i navigatori che digiteranno semplicemente l\' URL: http://www.tuosito.it, o se clicceranno sul link generato dalla ^H; macro.\r\n

\r\n\r\nPagina Non Trovata
\r\nSe la pagina richiesta non viene trovata sul sistema, il visitatore sarà reindirizzato alla home page o ad una pagina di errore dove verrà presentata anche la mappa del sito per aiutarlo a trovare cio che stava cercando. Deciderai tu cosa è meglio far visualizzare ai tuoi utenti.\r\n

\r\n\r\nDocument Type Declaration
\r\nAttualmente molti Browser differenti accedono alle tue pagine, compresi browsers automatizzati come gli spiders dei motori di ricerca. Molti di questi browsers vogliono sapere che tipo di contenuti il tuo sito distribuisce. Il doctype tag ti consente di specificarlo. Di default il C.M.S. genera contenuti compatibili cn HTML 4.0 .\r\n

Favicon
\r\nUna icona che appare su Internet Explorer nei \"Preferiti\". Per\r\nsapere di più sulla Favicon clicca\r\nqui.\r\n

Site Icon
\r\nUna icona che appare nella barra URL nella maggior parte dei moderni\r\nbrowsers. Può anche comparire nei bookmarks del browser. L\'immagine deve essere\r\ndi 16x16 pixels.

\r\n

\r\n\r\nAggiungi nota di modifica sui messaggi?
\r\nDi solito se un utente modifica un messaggio sul forum, una nota viene aggiunta al messaggio per identificare chi ha fatto la modifica, e quando. In alcuni siti questa informazione potrebbe non essere necessaria, per questo puoi decidere di disattivare la funzione.\r\n

\r\n\r\nFiltra i contributi in HTML
\r\nSoprattutto in un sito pubblico dove chiunque può postare sul forum o nel sistema di contribuzione degli utenti, è una buona idea filtrare i messaggi dal codice potenzialmente non compatibile, che potrebbe impedire una visualizzazione corretta del sito ai tuoi visitatori; e in alcuni casi, creare problemi di sicurezza. Usa questo settaggio per definire il livello di filtraggio che desideri applicare.\r\n\r\n

Massima Dimensione dell\'allegato
\r\nLa dimensione (in kilobytes) massima consentita agli allegati per essere\r\ncaricati sul sistema.\r\n

Massima Dimensione Immagine
\r\nSe delle immagini più grandi della massima dimensione consentita sono caricate\r\nsul tuo sistema, esse saranno ridimensionate alle dimensioni massime consentite\r\n. La massima dimensione è misurata in pixels ed usa la dimensione del lato più\r\nlungo dell\'immagine per determinare se il limite è stato raggiunto.\r\n

Massima Dimensione Immagine
\r\nSe le immagini caricate sul sistema eccedono la massima dimensione dell\'immagine, saranno riscalate alla dimensione massima. La dimensione massima dell\'immagine è misurata in pixel e usa la dimensione del lato più lungo dell\'immagine per determinare se il limite è stato raggiunto.\r\n

Dimensione Thumbnail
\r\nQuando le immagini sono caricate, automaticamente il sistema genera un\r\nthumbnails della dimensione qui specificata. Thumbnail è misurato in pixels.\r\n

Lunghezza della Preview del Frammento
\r\nQuanti caratteri del frammento devono essere visualizzati nell\'index principale\r\ndell\'Archivio Collaterale.

\r\n\r\nRighe della Text Area
\r\nQualcuno può avere esigenza di controllare le dimensioni dei forms che il C.M.S. genera. Con questo settaggio puoi specificare quante righe saranno visualizzate nelle textarea del sito.\r\n

\r\n\r\nColonne della Text Area
\r\nQualcuno può avere esigenza di controllare le dimensioni dei forms che il C.M.S. genera. Con questo settaggio puoi specificare quante colonne saranno visualizzate nelle textarea del sito.\r\n

\r\n\r\nDimensioni del Text Box
\r\nCon questo settaggio puoi definire quanti caratteri possono essere visualizzati nei text boxes del sito.\r\n

\r\n\r\nTimeout della Cache della pagina
\r\nLa quantità di tempo che le pagine devono rimanere in cache per gli utenti registrati del sito.\r\n

Timeout della Cache della pagina (visitatori)
\r\nLa quantità di tempo che le pagine devono rimanere in cache per i visitatori.\r\n

NOTA:
\r\nIl caching delle pagine è disponibile solo se l\'amministratore del sistema ha installato il modulo Perl Cache::FileCache. Usare il page caching può aumentare le prestazioni fino al 1000%.\r\n',1054481582,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (634,'WebGUI',8,'Home Page di Default
\r\nMolti piccoli siti non hanno una vera home page, preferiscono invece usare una pagina interna come \"Chi Siamo\" or \"Azienda\" come home page. Per questo motivo, puoi settare come pagina di default del tuo sito site qualsiasi pagina del sito stesso. Sarà la pagina che visualizzeranno i navigatori che digiteranno semplicemente l\' URL: http://www.tuosito.it, o se clicceranno sul link generato dalla ^H; macro.\r\n

\r\n\r\nPagina Non Trovata
\r\nSe la pagina richiesta non viene trovata sul sistema, il visitatore sarà reindirizzato alla home page o ad una pagina di errore dove verrà presentata anche la mappa del sito per aiutarlo a trovare cio che stava cercando. Deciderai tu cosa è meglio far visualizzare ai tuoi utenti.\r\n

\r\n\r\nDocument Type Declaration
\r\nAttualmente molti Browser differenti accedono alle tue pagine, compresi browsers automatizzati come gli spiders dei motori di ricerca. Molti di questi browsers vogliono sapere che tipo di contenuti il tuo sito distribuisce. Il doctype tag ti consente di specificarlo. Di default il C.M.S. genera contenuti compatibili cn HTML 4.0 .\r\n

Favicon
\r\nUna icona che appare su Internet Explorer nei \"Preferiti\". Per\r\nsapere di più sulla Favicon clicca\r\nqui.\r\n

Site Icon
\r\nUna icona che appare nella barra URL nella maggior parte dei moderni\r\nbrowsers. Può anche comparire nei bookmarks del browser. L\'immagine deve essere\r\ndi 16x16 pixels.

\r\n

\r\n\r\nAggiungi nota di modifica sui messaggi?
\r\nDi solito se un utente modifica un messaggio sul forum, una nota viene aggiunta al messaggio per identificare chi ha fatto la modifica, e quando. In alcuni siti questa informazione potrebbe non essere necessaria, per questo puoi decidere di disattivare la funzione.\r\n

\r\n\r\nFiltra i contributi in HTML
\r\nSoprattutto in un sito pubblico dove chiunque può postare sul forum o nel sistema di contribuzione degli utenti, è una buona idea filtrare i messaggi dal codice potenzialmente non compatibile, che potrebbe impedire una visualizzazione corretta del sito ai tuoi visitatori; e in alcuni casi, creare problemi di sicurezza. Usa questo settaggio per definire il livello di filtraggio che desideri applicare.\r\n\r\n

Massima Dimensione dell\'allegato
\r\nLa dimensione (in kilobytes) massima consentita agli allegati per essere\r\ncaricati sul sistema.\r\n

Massima Dimensione Immagine
\r\nSe delle immagini più grandi della massima dimensione consentita sono caricate\r\nsul tuo sistema, esse saranno ridimensionate alle dimensioni massime consentite\r\n. La massima dimensione è misurata in pixels ed usa la dimensione del lato più\r\nlungo dell\'immagine per determinare se il limite è stato raggiunto.\r\n

Massima Dimensione Immagine
\r\nSe le immagini caricate sul sistema eccedono la massima dimensione dell\'immagine, saranno riscalate alla dimensione massima. La dimensione massima dell\'immagine è misurata in pixel e usa la dimensione del lato più lungo dell\'immagine per determinare se il limite è stato raggiunto.\r\n

Dimensione Thumbnail
\r\nQuando le immagini sono caricate, automaticamente il sistema genera un\r\nthumbnails della dimensione qui specificata. Thumbnail è misurato in pixels.\r\n

Lunghezza della Preview del Frammento
\r\nQuanti caratteri del frammento devono essere visualizzati nell\'index principale\r\ndell\'Archivio Collaterale.

\r\n\r\nRighe della Text Area
\r\nQualcuno può avere esigenza di controllare le dimensioni dei forms che il C.M.S. genera. Con questo settaggio puoi specificare quante righe saranno visualizzate nelle textarea del sito.\r\n

\r\n\r\nColonne della Text Area
\r\nQualcuno può avere esigenza di controllare le dimensioni dei forms che il C.M.S. genera. Con questo settaggio puoi specificare quante colonne saranno visualizzate nelle textarea del sito.\r\n

\r\n\r\nDimensioni del Text Box
\r\nCon questo settaggio puoi definire quanti caratteri possono essere visualizzati nei text boxes del sito.\r\n

\r\n\r\nPrivilegi del Wobject
\r\nSeleziona \'SI\' per abilitare i privilegi a livello Wobject. Di default, i Wobjects sono settati per ereditare i privilegi del livello pagina.\r\n',1056807762,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (630,'WebGUI',8,'Per usare il motore di ricerca interno devi inserire la macro ^?; , o aggiungendo ?op=search alla fine di ogni URL.',1046123142,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (75,'LinkList',8,'Template Lista di Link',1046122994,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (18,'Product',8,'Aggiungi un altro Accessorio?',1046122891,NULL); @@ -10802,7 +10802,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (779,'WebGUI',8,'Immagine',1045753065,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (778,'WebGUI',8,'Descrizione Cartella',1045753054,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (777,'WebGUI',8,'Id Cartella',1045753038,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (776,'WebGUI',8,'Modifica Cartella',1045753023,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (775,'WebGUI',8,'Sei sicuro di voler cancellare questa cartella e spostare il suo contenuto nella cartella genitrice?',1045753006,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (775,'WebGUI',8,'Sei sicuro di voler cancellare questa cartella? Non potrà più essere recuperata una volta cancellata.',1056290077,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (774,'WebGUI',8,'Sei sicuro di vole cancellare questo elemento? Non sarà più recuperabile una volta eliminato.',1045752934,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (773,'WebGUI',8,'File',1045752719,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (772,'WebGUI',8,'Modifica File',1045752708,NULL); @@ -11148,8 +11148,8 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (32,'Survey',6,'Falskt',1047895703,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (31,'Survey',6,'Sant',1047895687,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (751,'WebGUI',6,'Bli denna användare.',1047895671,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (72,'Article',6,'Artikelmall',1047892178,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (896,'WebGUI',2,'Seiten Cache Timeout (Besucher)',1048242391,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (895,'WebGUI',2,'Seiten Cache Timeout',1048242376,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (896,'WebGUI',2,'Cache Timeout (Besucher)',1056542174,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (895,'WebGUI',2,'Cache Timeout',1056542158,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (893,'WebGUI',2,'Wobject Eigenschaften',1048242364,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (892,'WebGUI',2,'Diskussion',1048242354,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (891,'WebGUI',2,'Nur Makros blockieren.',1049099974,NULL); @@ -11165,7 +11165,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (1,'Discussion',2,'Beitr INSERT INTO international VALUES (887,'WebGUI',2,'Midas (Mozilla 1.3+)',1048175062,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (623,'WebGUI',2,'Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) sind \r\neine gute Möglichkeit, um das "Look and Feel", also das Aussehen einer \r\nSeite zu bestimmen. Sie werden sehr weitreichend in WebGUI benutzt.

Sollten \r\nSie mit der Benutzung von CSS nicht vertraut sein: Plain Black Software bietet \r\nSchulungsbereiche in XHTML und CSS an. Alternativ können Sie sich den exellenten \r\nCSS Editor von Bradsoft, Top Style \r\nanschauen.

Nachfolgend eine Liste von Style Klassen, die das Aussehen von \r\nWebGUI bestimmen: WebGUI: \r\n

A
Die Links.

BODY
Das Standard-Setup aller Seiten innerhalb \r\neines Styles. \r\n

H1
Die Überschriften einer jeden Seite. \r\n

.accountOptions
Die Link, die unter den Login und Zugangsdaten \r\nFormularen angezeigt werden. \r\n

.adminBar
Die Leiste, die im Kopf der Seite erscheint, wenn Sie \r\nim Editiermodus sind (Administrationsmenü)

.content
Der Haupt Inhaltsbereich \r\nauf allen Seiten dieses Styles \r\n

.formDescription
Die Zeichen der Formelemente (z. B. im Mailformular \r\nder Text "Von: ")

.formSubtext
Die Zeichen unterhalb \r\nvon Form-Elementen

.highlight
Bedeutet ein hervorgehobenes Element, \r\n so zum Beispiel können Sie hiermit den Beitrag, der gerade gelesen wird, hervorheben.

.horizontalMenu
Das \r\nhorizontale Menu (sofern Sie eins verwenden)

.pagination
Die "Vorher" \r\n/ "Weiter" Links auf Seiten, die sich über mehrere Seiten erstrecken.

.selectedMenuItem
Hiermit \r\nkönnen Sie in einigen der Menu-Makros die aktuelle Seite hervorheben.

.tableData
Die \r\nDatenreihen u.a.im Diskussionsforum und im Benutzerbeitragssystem.

.tableHeader
Die \r\nSpaltenköpfe u.a .im Diskussionsforum und im Benutzerbeitragssystem.

.tableMenu
Das \r\nMenu  u.a .im Diskussionsforum und im Benutzerbeitragssystem.

.verticalMenu
Das \r\nvertikale Menü (sofern Sie eines verwenden)

Beachte: Einige \r\nWobjects und Makros haben noch ihre eigenen zusätzlichen Stylesheet Klassen, \r\ndie in den jeweiligen Hilfebereichen näher erläutert sind.

',1048589344,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (621,'WebGUI',2,'In den Styles werden WebGUI Makros unterstützt. Sehen Sie unter Makros verwenden nach, \r\num weitere Informationen erhalten.

Style Name
Ein eindeutiger Name, \r\num zu beschreiben, wie der Style im Überblick aussieht. \r\n

Body
Damit ist der HTML Body Bereich Ihrer Seite gemeint. Hier \r\nwird u. a. festgelegt, wo die Seitennavigation liegen soll, oder auch viele \r\nandere Dinge, wie Logo, Copyright, etc. Ein Body muss mindestens einige Dinge \r\nenthalten, wie das \r\n^AdminBar; Makro und das ^-; (Seperator) Makro. Das ^AdminBar; Makro legt fest, \r\nwo WebGUI die Administrationsfunktionen anzeigen soll, das ^-; Makro legt fest, \r\nwo WebGUI den eigentlichen Inhalt der Seite platzieren soll. \r\n

Sollten Sie Unterstützung beim Entwerfen eines Styles/Layouts Ihrer Seite \r\nbenötigen: Plain \r\nBlack Software bietet kostengünstige Unterstützung an. \r\n

Viele WebGUI Nutzer fügen Makros in den Body-Bereich ein, um die Navigationselemente \r\neinzubinden oder viele weitere WebGUI Features. \r\n

Style Sheet
Geben Sie hier die Stylesheet Einträge an. Stylesheets \r\nwerden u. a. zum Festlegen der Darstellung von Farben, Schriftarten, Schriftgrössen \r\nund anderen Eigenschaften  benutzt. Sehen Sie unter Style Sheets verwenden nach, \r\num weitere Informationen zu erhalten. \r\n

Erfahrene Benutzer: für eine grössere Performance können Sie auch \r\neine Stylesheet-Datei erstellen, die Sie z. B. webgui.css nennen können und \r\nfügen Sie einen Eintrag wie diesen hier ein:

\r\n',1048591989,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (632,'WebGUI',2,'Wobjects können Sie hinzufügen, indem Sie aus dem Menü "Inhalt hinzufügen \r\n...", das sich in der Regel oben rechts befindet, ein beliebiges Wobject \r\nauswählen. Sie können es bearbeiten, wenn Sie den Bearbeiten-Button anklicken, \r\nder immer über einem Wobject steht, das Sie in die Seite eingebunden haben. \r\n

Einige Eigenschaften finden Sie bei fast allen Wobjects. Diese wären: \r\n

Wobject ID
Dies ist das eindeutige Kennzeichen das WebGUI benutzt, \r\num diese Wobject Instanz zu identifizieren. Normale Benutzer sollten eigentlich \r\nniemals mit dieser Wobject ID konfrontiert werden, aber einige erfahrene Benutzer \r\nsollten sie schon kennen, da sie z.b. hilfreich in den SQL \r\nReports sind.

Titel
Der Titel des Wobjects. Typischerweise wird \r\ndieser im Kopfbereich eines jeden Wobjects angezeigt. \r\n

Beachte: Sie sollten immer einen Titel vergeben, es sei denn, sie \r\nschalten die Anzeige des Titels ab (siehe nächste Einstellung). Und zwar sollten \r\nSie das u. a. deswegen tun, da dieser Titel auch im Mülleimer oder in der Zwischenablage \r\nangezeigt wird. So können Sie immer auf Anhieb sehen, um welches Wobject es \r\nsich eigentlich handelt.

Titel anzeigen?
Möchten Sie, dass der Titel \r\nangezeigt wird? \r\n

Makros ausführen?
Möchten Sie, dass Makros, die Sie im Inhaltsbereich \r\nschreiben, auch ausgeführt werden? Manchmal möchten Sie dies zulassen, aber \r\noft besteht keine Notwendigkeit dafür. Wenn Sie das Ausführen von Makros ausschalten, \r\nwerden Ihre Seiten auch ein wenig schneller aufgebaut. \r\n

Position des Templates
Template Positionen gehen von 0 (Null) \r\nbis zu beliebigen Nummern. Wie viele hier möglich sind, ist abhängig von dem \r\nTemplate, dass dieser Seite zugeordnet ist. Das Standard Template bietet nur \r\neine Template Position, andere können mehr anbieten. Wenn Sie also eine Template \r\nPosition auswählen, bestimmen Sie, wo das Wobject innerhalb der Seite erscheinen \r\nsoll.

Anfangsdatum
Ab welchem Datum soll das Wobject auf der Seite \r\nerscheinen? Vor diesem Zeitpunkt ist es dann nur für Content Manager sichtbar.

Ende Datum
Bis \r\nzu welchem Datum soll das Wobject angezeigt werden? Nach diesem Zeitpunkt ist \r\nes dann nur für Content Manager sichtbar.

Inhalt/Beschreibung
Ein \r\nInhaltsbereich, in den Sie soviel Text schreiben können, wie Sie möchten. Wenn \r\nSie z. B. eine FAQ hinzufügen, können Sie hier eine Zusammenfassung hineinschreiben, \r\num zu definieren, um welche FAQ es sich handelt. Wenn Sie das Wobject "Artikel" \r\neinfügen, schreiben Sie hier den eigentlichen Text des Artikels, also den Inhalt, \r\nhinein.

',1048589666,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (632,'WebGUI',2,'Wobjects können Sie hinzufügen, indem Sie aus dem Menü "Inhalt hinzufügen \r\n...", das sich in der Regel oben rechts befindet, ein beliebiges Wobject \r\nauswählen. Sie können es bearbeiten, wenn Sie den Bearbeiten-Button anklicken, \r\nder immer über einem Wobject steht, das Sie in die Seite eingebunden haben. \r\n

Einige Eigenschaften finden Sie bei fast allen Wobjects. Diese wären: \r\n

Wobject ID
Dies ist das eindeutige Kennzeichen das WebGUI benutzt, \r\num diese Wobject Instanz zu identifizieren. Normale Benutzer sollten eigentlich \r\nniemals mit dieser Wobject ID konfrontiert werden, aber einige erfahrene Benutzer \r\nsollten sie schon kennen, da sie z.b. hilfreich in den SQL \r\nReports sind.

Titel
Der Titel des Wobjects. Typischerweise wird \r\ndieser im Kopfbereich eines jeden Wobjects angezeigt. \r\n

Beachte: Sie sollten immer einen Titel vergeben, es sei denn, sie \r\nschalten die Anzeige des Titels ab (siehe nächste Einstellung). Und zwar sollten \r\nSie das u. a. deswegen tun, da dieser Titel auch im Mülleimer oder in der Zwischenablage \r\nangezeigt wird. So können Sie immer auf Anhieb sehen, um welches Wobject es \r\nsich eigentlich handelt.

Titel anzeigen?
Möchten Sie, dass der Titel \r\nangezeigt wird? \r\n

Makros ausführen?
Möchten Sie, dass Makros, die Sie im Inhaltsbereich \r\nschreiben, auch ausgeführt werden? Manchmal möchten Sie dies zulassen, aber \r\noft besteht keine Notwendigkeit dafür. Wenn Sie das Ausführen von Makros ausschalten, \r\nwerden Ihre Seiten auch ein wenig schneller aufgebaut. \r\n

Position des Templates
Template Positionen gehen von 0 (Null) \r\nbis zu beliebigen Nummern. Wie viele hier möglich sind, ist abhängig von dem \r\nTemplate, dass dieser Seite zugeordnet ist. Das Standard Template bietet nur \r\neine Template Position, andere können mehr anbieten. Wenn Sie also eine Template \r\nPosition auswählen, bestimmen Sie, wo das Wobject innerhalb der Seite erscheinen \r\nsoll.

Anfangsdatum
Ab welchem Datum soll das Wobject auf der Seite \r\nerscheinen? Vor diesem Zeitpunkt ist es dann nur für Content Manager sichtbar.

Ende Datum
Bis \r\nzu welchem Datum soll das Wobject angezeigt werden? Nach diesem Zeitpunkt ist \r\nes dann nur für Content Manager sichtbar.

Besitzer
Der Besitzer \r\neines Wobjects ist gewöhnlich die Person, die das Wobject erstellt hat. Dieser \r\nBenutzer hat die vollen Bearbeitungs- und Anschaurechte, es sei denn, die Berechtigungen \r\nder Seite, auf der das Wobject sich befindet, gewähren diesem Benutzer keine \r\nRechte.

Beachte: Der Besitzer kann nur von einem Administrator geändert \r\nwerden. \r\n

Wer kann anschauen?
Wählen !\n Sie die Gruppe aus, die dieses \r\nWobject anschauen darf. Wenn Sie möchten, dass sowohl Besucher als auch registrierte \r\nBenutzer dies dürfen, wählen Sie "Jeder" aus. \r\n

Wer kann bearbeiten?
Wählen Sie die Gruppe aus, die dieses Wobject \r\nbearbeiten darf. Diese Gruppe hat dann auch die Berechtigung, das Wobject anzuschauen.

\r\n

Inhalt/Beschreibung
Ein \r\nInhaltsbereich, in den Sie soviel Text schreiben können, wie Sie möchten. Wenn \r\nSie z. B. eine FAQ hinzufügen, können Sie hier eine Zusammenfassung hineinschreiben, \r\num zu definieren, um welche FAQ es sich handelt. Wenn Sie das Wobject "Artikel" \r\neinfügen, schreiben Sie hier den eigentlichen Text des Artikels, also den Inhalt, \r\nhinein.

',1056837644,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (864,'WebGUI',2,'Zeitabstand zur Ablaufankündigung',1045494167,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (866,'WebGUI',2,'Benachrichtigungstext zum Ablaufdatum',1045494104,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (863,'WebGUI',2,'Löschen Zeitspanne',1045494042,NULL); @@ -11203,17 +11203,17 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (968,'WebGUI',2,'Zwischenablage, leeren',105524 INSERT INTO international VALUES (2,'SI_scaledImage',2,'

Das ^SI(); Makro ist nur wirklich sinnvoll, wenn Image::Magick installiert \r\nist. Es bietet die Möglichkeit, Bilder aus dem Uploadmanager zu skalieren, entweder \r\nunter Beibehaltung der Original-Seitenverhältnisse oder durch die Definition \r\nneuer Breiten- und Höhenverhältnisse.

Beim ^SI(); Makro wird ähnlich wie beim \r\n ^I(); Makro ein \r\n<img> Tag generiert. Andererseits werden aber die Zusatzparameter, die \r\nim Uploadmanager für eine Grafik angegeben wurden (border etc.) ignoriert.

\r\n

Warnung


When the ^SI(); macro scales an image it saves it in the \r\ncollateral node with the original (with an extended filename detailing \r\ndimensions), this allows the scaled image to be easily retrieved instead of \r\nrescaling the image each time the macro is used. However, at the moment, \r\nTHESE IMAGES ARE NEVER DELETED. \r\n

\r\n

^SI(collateralIdent,width,height,parameters);

\r\n\r\n

\r\n

Beispiele

\r\n

Anzeige einer Grafik nach Name
^SI(myimage); \r\n

Anzeige einer Grafik nach ID
^SI(666); \r\n

Skalierung nach der Höhe
^SI(666,25); \r\n

Skalierung nach der Breite
^SI(666,0,25); \r\n

Verschiedene Höhe und Breite
^SI(666,148,25); \r\n

Verwenden von Parametern
^SI(666,0,0,border="0");

',1055243332,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (890,'WebGUI',2,'WebGUI besitzt ein Sub-System, das Tabulatoren erstellen kann. Sie können dies \r\nin komplexen Formularen sehen, wie z.b. im Editiermodus einer Seite. Um dieses \r\nTabulator-System dem Layout ihrer Seite anzupassen, müssen sie einige Einträge \r\nin ihrem StyleSheet einfügen. \r\n

Nachfolgend die verfügbaren Style-Sheet-Klassen: \r\n

.tab
Das Standard Aussehen eines jeden Tabulatoren. \r\n

div.tabs
Damit können Sie einige Eigenschaften für alle Tabulatoren \r\neinstellen. Es sollte für die Text-Labels in den Tabulatoren benutzt werden.

.tabBody
Der \r\nInhalt eines jeden Tabulators. Damit stellen sie ein, wie das Formular aussehen \r\nsoll. Beachten sie, dass für die beste Darstellung die Background Color der \r\nBackground Color von .tabActive entsprechen müsste.

.tabHover
Die \r\nDarstellung, wenn man mit der Mausüber den Tabulator geht (Hover-Effekt) \r\n

.tabActive
Das Aussehen des aktuell sichtbaren Tabulators. \r\n

Beispiele
Hier finden Sie ein Beispiellayout, das für alle Standardbedingungen \r\noptimal ist: \r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n
Weisse oder Styles mit hellen Farben 
.tab {\r\n  border: 1px solid black;\r\n   background-color: #eeeeee;\r\n}\r\n.tabBody {\r\n   border: 1px solid black;\r\n   border-top: 1px solid black;\r\n   border-left: 1px solid black;\r\n   background-color: #dddddd; \r\n}\r\ndiv.tabs {\r\n    line-height: 15px;\r\n    font-size: 14px;\r\n}\r\n.tabHover {\r\n   background-color: #cccccc;\r\n}\r\n.tabActive { \r\n   background-color: #dddddd; \r\n}\r\n
Schwarze oder Styles mit dunklen Farben 
.tab {\r\n  border: 1px solid white;\r\n   background-color: #333333;\r\n}\r\n.tabBody {\r\n   border: 1px solid white;\r\n   border-top: 1px solid white;\r\n   border-left: 1px solid white;\r\n   background-color: #444444; \r\n}\r\ndiv.tabs {\r\n    line-height: 15px;\r\n    font-size: 14px;\r\n}\r\n.tabHover {\r\n   background-color: #555555;\r\n}\r\n.tabActive { \r\n   background-color: #444444; \r\n}\r\n
\r\n',1048592630,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (841,'WebGUI',12,'Navigerings Makroer',1048550113,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (840,'WebGUI',12,'These macros are designed to provide programming-like functionality. They are \r\npowerful when used appropriately, and dangerous when used carelessly. Take care \r\nwhen using these macros. \r\n

^D; or ^D(); - Date
The current date and time. \r\n

You can configure the date by using date formatting symbols. For instance, if \r\nyou created a macro like this ^D(\"%c %D, %y\"); it would output \r\nSeptember 26, 2001. The following are the available date formatting \r\nsymbols: \r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n
%%%
%y4 digit year
%Y2 digit year
%m2 digit month
%Mvariable digit month
%cmonth name
%d2 digit day of month
%Dvariable digit day of month
%wday of week name
%h2 digit base 12 hour
%Hvariable digit base 12 hour
%j2 digit base 24 hour
%Jvariable digit base 24 hour
%plower case am/pm
%Pupper case AM/PM
%zuser preference date format
%Zuser preference time format
\r\n

^Env()
Can be used to display a web server environment variable on \r\na page. The environment variables available on each server are different, but \r\nyou can find out which ones your web server has by going to: \r\nhttp://www.yourwebguisite.com/env.pl \r\n

The macro should be specified like this ^Env(\"REMOTE_ADDR\"); \r\n

^Execute();
Allows a content manager or administrator to execute an \r\nexternal program. Takes the format of ^Execute(\"/this/file.sh\");. \r\n

^FormParam();
This macro is mainly used in generating dynamic \r\nqueries in SQL Reports. Using this macro you can pull the value of any form \r\nfield simply by specifing the name of the form field, like this: \r\n^FormParam(\"phoneNumber\"); \r\n

^Include();
Allows a content manager or administrator to include a \r\nfile from the local filesystem. \r\n

Example: ^Include(\"/this/file.html\"); \r\n

^International();
Pull a translated message from the \r\ninternationalization system. \r\n

Example: ^International(45,\"Article\"); \r\n

^Quote();
Use this to escape a string before using it in a database \r\nquery. \r\n

^Page();
This can be used to retrieve information about the current \r\npage. For instance it could be used to get the page URL like this \r\n^Page(\"urlizedTitle\"); or to get the menu title like this ^Page(\"menuTitle\");. \r\n

^SQL();
A one line SQL report. Sometimes you just need to pull \r\nsomething back from the database quickly. This macro is also useful in extending \r\nthe SQL Report wobject. It uses the numeric macros (^0; ^1; ^2; etc) to position \r\ndata and can also use the ^rownum; macro just like the SQL Report wobject. \r\nExamples: \r\n

^SQL(\"select count(*) from users\",\"There are ^0; users on this system.\"); \r\n

^SQL(\"select userId,username from users order by username\",\"<a \r\nhref=\'^/;?op=viewProfile&uid=^0;\'>^1;</a><br>\"); \r\n

^URLEncode();
This macro is mainly useful in SQL reports, but it \r\ncould be useful elsewhere as well. It takes the input of a string and URL \r\nEncodes it so that the string can be passed through a URL. It\'s syntax looks \r\nlike this: ^URLEncode(\"Is this my string?\"); \r\n

^User();
This macro will allow you to display any information from \r\na user\'s account or profile. For instance, if you wanted to display a user\'s \r\nemail address you\'d create this macro: ^User(\"email\"); \r\n

^*; or ^*(); - Random Number
A randomly generated number. This is \r\noften used on images (such as banner ads) that you want to ensure do not cache. \r\nIn addition, you may configure this macro like this ^*(100); to create a \r\nrandom number between 0 and 100. \r\n

^-;,^0;,^1;,^2;,^3;, etc.
These macros are reserved for \r\nsystem/wobject-specific functions as in the SQL Report wobject and the Body in \r\nthe Style Manager.

',1048550091,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (840,'WebGUI',12,'These macros are designed to provide programming-like functionality. They are \r\npowerful when used appropriately, and dangerous when used carelessly. Take care \r\nwhen using these macros. \r\n

NOTE: These macros are included in WebGUI in order to provide very \r\npowerful display mechanisms. Though they could be used to write simple web \r\napplications, this is not their intended use, nor is it supported or condoned by \r\nPlain Black. If you find yourself trying to do something like that, just write a \r\nmacro. =) \r\n

^D; or ^D(); - Date
The current date and time. \r\n

You can configure the date by using date formatting symbols. For instance, if \r\nyou created a macro like this ^D(\"%c %D, %y\"); it would output \r\nSeptember 26, 2001. The following are the available date formatting \r\nsymbols: \r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n
%%%
%y4 digit year
%Y2 digit year
%m2 digit month
%Mvariable digit month
%cmonth name
%d2 digit day of month
%Dvariable digit day of month
%wday of week name
%h2 digit base 12 hour
%Hvariable digit base 12 hour
%j2 digit base 24 hour
%Jvariable digit base 24 hour
%plower case am/pm
%Pupper case AM/PM
%zuser preference date format
%Zuser preference time format
\r\n

^Env()
Can be used to display a web server environment variable on \r\na page. The environment variables available on each server are different, but \r\nyou can find out which ones your web server has by going to: \r\nhttp://www.yourwebguisite.com/env.pl \r\n

The macro should be specified like this ^Env(\"REMOTE_ADDR\"); \r\n

^Execute();
Allows a content manager or administrator to execute an \r\nexternal program. Takes the format of ^Execute(\"/this/file.sh\");. \r\n

^FormParam();
This macro is mainly used in generating dynamic \r\nqueries in SQL Reports. Using this macro you can pull the value of any form \r\nfield simply by specifing the name of the form field, like this: \r\n^FormParam(\"phoneNumber\"); \r\n

^If();
A simple conditional statement (IF/THEN/ELSE) to control \r\nlayout and messages. \r\n

Examples:
Display Happy New Year on 1st January: ^If(\'^D(\"%m%d\");\' \r\neq \'0101\' , Happy New Year); \r\n

Display a message to people on your subnet \r\n(192.168.1.*):
^If(\'^Env(\"REMOTE_ADDR\");\' =~ /^192.168.1/,\"Hi co-worker\",\"Hi \r\nStranger\"); \r\n

Display a message to Windows users:
^If(\'^Env(\"HTTP_USER_AGENT\");\' =~ \r\n/windows/i,\"Hey... Linux is free !\"); \r\n

Display a message if a user is behind a proxy:
^If(\'^Env(\"HTTP_VIA\");\' ne \r\n\"\", You\'re behind a proxy !, Proxy-free is the best...); \r\n

Display Good Morning/Afternoon/Evening:
^If(^D(\"%J\");<=12,Good \r\nMorning,^If(^D(\"%J\");<=18,Good Afternoon,Good evening);); \r\n

^Include();
Allows a content manager or administrator to include a \r\nfile from the local filesystem. \r\n

Example: ^Include(\"/this/file.html\"); \r\n

^International();
Pull a translated message from the \r\ninternationalization system. \r\n

Example: ^International(45,\"Article\"); \r\n

^Quote();
Use this to escape a string before using it in a database \r\nquery. \r\n

^Page();
This can be used to retrieve information about the current \r\npage. For instance it could be used to get the page URL like this \r\n^Page(\"urlizedTitle\"); or to get the menu title like this ^Page(\"menuTitle\");. \r\n

^SQL();
A one line SQL report. Sometimes you just need to pull \r\nsomething back from the database quickly. This macro is also useful in extending \r\nthe SQL Report wobject. It uses the numeric macros (^0; ^1; ^2; etc) to position \r\ndata and can also use the ^rownum; macro just like the SQL Report wobject. \r\nExamples: \r\n

^SQL(\"select count(*) from users\",\"There are ^0; users on this system.\"); \r\n

^SQL(\"select userId,username from users order by username\",\"<a \r\nhref=\'^/;?op=viewProfile&uid=^0;\'>^1;</a><br>\"); \r\n

^URLEncode();
This macro is mainly useful in SQL reports, but it \r\ncould be useful elsewhere as well. It takes the input of a string and URL \r\nEncodes it so that the string can be passed through a URL. It\'s syntax looks \r\nlike this: ^URLEncode(\"Is this my string?\"); \r\n

^User();
This macro will allow you to display any information from \r\na user\'s account or profile. For instance, if you wanted to display a user\'s \r\nemail address you\'d create this macro: ^User(\"email\"); \r\n

^*; or ^*(); - Random Number
A randomly generated number. This is \r\noften used on images (such as banner ads) that you want to ensure do not cache. \r\nIn addition, you may configure this macro like this ^*(100); to create a \r\nrandom number between 0 and 100. \r\n

^-;,^0;,^1;,^2;,^3;, etc.
These macros are reserved for \r\nsystem/wobject-specific functions as in the SQL Report wobject and the Body in \r\nthe Style Manager.

',1055005180,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (839,'WebGUI',12,'Programmerer Makroer',1048550033,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (832,'WebGUI',12,'

The collateral management system has several macros for its specific purpose. \r\n

\r\n

^File();
This macro builds a quick file link. It creates an icon \r\nfor the file and outputs the files name. Then it links them both to the file for \r\ndownloading. \r\n

^I();
This macro retrieves an image from the collateral management \r\nsystem along with an HTML image tag so that you can quickly display an image \r\nfrom the repository in your content. \r\n

Example: ^I(\"logo\"); \r\n

^i();
This macro retrieves the URL for any file in the collateral \r\nmanagement system. \r\n

Example: ^i(\"status report\"); \r\n

^Snippet();
This macro retrieves the contents of a snippet in the \r\ncollateral management system and inserts it into the page. \r\n

Example: ^Snippet(\"flash code\"); \r\n

^Thumbnail();
This macro retrieves the URL for the thumbnail of any \r\nimage in the collateral management system. \r\n

Example: ^Thumbnail(\"logo\"); \r\n

^ThumbnailLinker();
This macro builds a quick image viewer using \r\nnothing more than the collateral management system. It creates a thumbnail image \r\nwith the name of the image under it and then links them both to the full sized \r\nimage. \r\n

Example: ^ThumbnailLinker(\"logo\");

',1048549990,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (831,'WebGUI',12,'Collateral Makroer',1048549876,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (828,'WebGUI',12,'

De fleste Wobject har templates som tillater deg å endre utseende på \r\nbrukergrensesnittet. De wobjectene som har templates har alle et felles sett med \r\nvariabler som kan brukes i layouten. I tillegg til deres egne lokale variable. \r\nDe følgende er en liste over felles variable som deles mellom alle Wobjects.

\r\n

title
The title for this wobject.

\r\n

displayTitle
A conditional variable for whether or not \r\nthe title should be displayed.

\r\n

description
The description of this wobject.

\r\n

wobjectId
The unique identifier that WebGUI uses to \r\ncontrol this wobject.

',1048549857,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (827,'WebGUI',12,'Wobject Template',1048549794,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (832,'WebGUI',12,'The collateral management system has several macros for its specific purpose. \r\n

^File();
This macro builds a quick file link. It creates an icon \r\nfor the file and outputs the files name. Then it links them both to the file for \r\ndownloading. \r\n

^I();
This macro retrieves an image from the collateral management \r\nsystem along with an HTML image tag so that you can quickly display an image \r\nfrom the repository in your content. \r\n

Example: ^I(\"logo\"); \r\n

^i();
This macro retrieves the URL for any file in the collateral \r\nmanagement system. \r\n

Example: ^i(\"status report\"); \r\n

^RandomImage();
This macro takes a collateral folder as a \r\nparameter. If the folder name is omitted, then the root folder will be used. The \r\nmacro then randomly chooses an image in the folder and returns it in much the \r\nsame way the ^I(); macro works. \r\n

Example: ^RandomImage(\"site headers\"); \r\n

^RandomSnippet();
This macro takes a collateral folder as a \r\nparameter. If the folder name is omitted, then the root folder will be used. The \r\nmacro then randomly chooses a snippet from the folder and returns it in much the \r\nsame way the ^Snippet(); macro works. \r\n

Example: ^RandomSnippet(\"quips\"); \r\n

^SI();
The Scaled Image macro allows images to be found in the \r\ncollateral and scaled (on the server-side), either maintaining the original \r\naspect ratio or an entirely new ratio of your design. \r\n

It takes four parameters. The first is the image name or optionally the \r\ncollateral id. The second is the width. Set the width to \"0\" to maintain aspect \r\nratio by height. The third is height. Set the height to \"0\" to maintain aspect \r\nratio by width. The fourth parameter allows you to specify additional parameters \r\nto the image. \r\n

Examples:
Retrieving an image by name (no scaling)
^SI(myimage); \r\n\r\n

Retrieving an image by collateralId (no scaling)
^SI(66); \r\n

Scaling by width, maintaining aspect ratio
^SI(66,25); \r\n

Scaling by height, maintaining aspect ratio
^SI(66,0,25); \r\n

Playing with the aspect ratio
^SI(66,148,25); \r\n

Using parameters
^SI(66,0,0,\'border=\"0\"\'); \r\n

^Snippet();
This macro retrieves the contents of a snippet in the \r\ncollateral management system and inserts it into the page. \r\n

Example: ^Snippet(\"flash code\"); \r\n

^Thumbnail();
This macro retrieves the URL for the thumbnail of any \r\nimage in the collateral management system. \r\n

Example: ^Thumbnail(\"logo\"); \r\n

^ThumbnailLinker();
This macro builds a quick image viewer using \r\nnothing more than the collateral management system. It creates a thumbnail image \r\nwith the name of the image under it and then links them both to the full sized \r\nimage. You can also specify a \"1\" as a second parameter to have the linker \r\ncreate a new window to display the linked image. \r\n

Example: ^ThumbnailLinker(\"logo\");

',1055005131,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (831,'WebGUI',12,'Collateral Makroer',1054672982,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (828,'WebGUI',12,'

De fleste Wobject har templates som tillater deg å endre utseende på \r\nbrukergrensesnittet. De wobjectene som har templates har alle et felles sett med \r\nvariabler som kan brukes i layouten. I tillegg til deres egne lokale variable. \r\nDe følgende er en liste over felles variable som deles mellom alle Wobjects.

\r\n

title
The title for this wobject.

\r\n

displayTitle
A conditional variable for whether or not \r\nthe title should be displayed.

\r\n

description
The description of this wobject.

\r\n

wobjectId
The unique identifier that WebGUI uses to \r\ncontrol this wobject.

\r\n

isShortcut
A conditional indicating if this wobject is a shortcut \r\nto an original wobject. \r\n

originalURL
If this wobject is a shortcut, then this URL will \r\ndirect you to the original wobject.

',1055005012,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (827,'WebGUI',12,'Wobject Template',1054673008,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (677,'WebGUI',12,'Wobject, Ny/Endre',1048549776,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (671,'WebGUI',12,'Wobjects, Bruker',1048549749,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (669,'WebGUI',12,'Makroer, Bruker',1048549720,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (668,'WebGUI',12,'Style Sheets, Bruker',1048549701,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (634,'WebGUI',12,'Default Home Page
Some really small sites don\'t have a home \r\npage, but instead like to use one of their internal pages like \"About Us\" or \r\n\"Company Information\" as their home page. For that reason, you can set the \r\ndefault page of your site to any page in the site. That page will be the one \r\npeople go to if they type in just your URL http://www.mywebguisite.com, or if \r\nthey click on the Home link generated by the ^H; macro. \r\n

Not Found Page
If a page that a user requests is not found in the \r\nsystem, the user can be redirected to the home page or to an error page where \r\nthey can attempt to find what they were looking for. You decide which is better \r\nfor your users. \r\n

Document Type Declaration
These days it is very common to have a \r\nwide array of browsers accessing your site, including automated browsers like \r\nsearch engine spiders. Many of those browsers want to know what kind of content \r\nyou are serving. The doctype tag allows you to specify that. By default WebGUI \r\ngenerates HTML 4.0 compliant content. \r\n

Add edit stamp to posts?
Typically if a user edits a post on a \r\ndiscussion, a stamp is added to that post to identify who made the edit, and at \r\nwhat time. On some sites that information is not necessary, therefore you can \r\nturn it off here. \r\n

Filter Contributed HTML
Especially when running a public site where \r\nanybody can post to your message boards or user submission systems, it is often \r\na good idea to filter their content for malicious code that can harm the viewing \r\nexperience of your visitors; And in some circumstances, it can even cause \r\nsecurity problems. Use this setting to select the level of filtering you wish to \r\napply. \r\n

Maximum Attachment Size
The size (in kilobytes) of the maximum \r\nallowable attachment to be uploaded to your system. \r\n

Max Image Size
If images are uploaded to your system that are \r\nbigger than the max image size, then they will be resized to the max image size. \r\nThe max image size is measured in pixels and will use the size of the longest \r\nside of the image to determine if the limit has been reached. \r\n

Thumbnail Size
When images are uploaded to your system, they will \r\nautomatically have thumbnails generated at the size specified here (unless \r\noverridden on a case-by-case basis). Thumbnail size is measured in pixels. \r\n

Snippet Preview Length
How many characters of a snippet should be \r\ndisplayed in the collateral management system main listing. \r\n

Text Area Rows
Some sites wish to control the size of the forms \r\nthat WebGUI generates. With this setting you can specify how many rows of \r\ncharacters will be displayed in textareas on the site. \r\n

Text Area Columns
Some sites wish to control the size of the forms \r\nthat WebGUI generates. With this setting you can specify how many columns of \r\ncharacters will be displayed in textareas on the site. \r\n

Text Box Size
Some sites wish to control the size of the forms that \r\nWebGUI generates. With this setting you can specify how characters can be \r\ndisplayed at once in text boxes on the site. \r\n

Page Cache Timeout
The amount of time pages should remain cached \r\nfor registered users. \r\n

Page Cache Timeout (Visitors)
The amount of time pages should \r\nremain cached for visitors. \r\n

NOTE: Page caching is only available if your administrator has \r\ninstalled the Cache::FileCache Perl module. Using page caching can improve site \r\nperformance by as much as 1000%.

',1048549649,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (634,'WebGUI',12,'Default Home Page
Some really small sites don\'t have a home \r\npage, but instead like to use one of their internal pages like \"About Us\" or \r\n\"Company Information\" as their home page. For that reason, you can set the \r\ndefault page of your site to any page in the site. That page will be the one \r\npeople go to if they type in just your URL http://www.mywebguisite.com, or if \r\nthey click on the Home link generated by the ^H; macro. \r\n

Not Found Page
If a page that a user requests is not found in the \r\nsystem, the user can be redirected to the home page or to an error page where \r\nthey can attempt to find what they were looking for. You decide which is better \r\nfor your users. \r\n

Document Type Declaration
These days it is very common to have a \r\nwide array of browsers accessing your site, including automated browsers like \r\nsearch engine spiders. Many of those browsers want to know what kind of content \r\nyou are serving. The doctype tag allows you to specify that. By default WebGUI \r\ngenerates HTML 4.0 compliant content. \r\n

Favicon
An icon that appears on Internet Explorer short cuts such \r\nas your \"Favorites\". To learn more about Favicon click here. \r\n

Site Icon
An icon that appears in the URL bar of most modern \r\nbrowsers. It may also appear in the bookmarks of the browser. The image must be \r\n16x16 pixels. \r\n

Add edit stamp to posts?
Typically if a user edits a post on a \r\ndiscussion, a stamp is added to that post to identify who made the edit, and at \r\nwhat time. On some sites that information is not necessary, therefore you can \r\nturn it off here. \r\n

Filter Contributed HTML
Especially when running a public site where \r\nanybody can post to your message boards or user submission systems, it is often \r\na good idea to filter their content for malicious code that can harm the viewing \r\nexperience of your visitors; And in some circumstances, it can even cause \r\nsecurity problems. Use this setting to select the level of filtering you wish to \r\napply. \r\n

Maximum Attachment Size
The size (in kilobytes) of the maximum \r\nallowable attachment to be uploaded to your system. \r\n

Max Image Size
If images are uploaded to your system that are \r\nbigger than the max image size, then they will be resized to the max image size. \r\nThe max image size is measured in pixels and will use the size of the longest \r\nside of the image to determine if the limit has been reached. \r\n

Thumbnail Size
When images are uploaded to your system, they will \r\nautomatically have thumbnails generated at the size specified here (unless \r\noverridden on a case-by-case basis). Thumbnail size is measured in pixels. \r\n

Snippet Preview Length
How many characters of a snippet should be \r\ndisplayed in the collateral management system main listing. \r\n

Text Area Rows
Some sites wish to control the size of the forms \r\nthat WebGUI generates. With this setting you can specify how many rows of \r\ncharacters will be displayed in textareas on the site. \r\n

Text Area Columns
Some sites wish to control the size of the forms \r\nthat WebGUI generates. With this setting you can specify how many columns of \r\ncharacters will be displayed in textareas on the site. \r\n

Text Box Size
Some sites wish to control the size of the forms that \r\nWebGUI generates. With this setting you can specify how characters can be \r\ndisplayed at once in text boxes on the site. \r\n

Page Cache Timeout
The amount of time pages should remain cached \r\nfor registered users. \r\n

Page Cache Timeout (Visitors)
The amount of time pages should \r\nremain cached for visitors. \r\n

NOTE: Page caching is only available if your administrator has \r\ninstalled the Cache::FileCache Perl module. Using page caching can improve site \r\nperformance by as much as 1000%.

',1055004920,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (632,'WebGUI',12,'You can add wobjects by selecting from the Add Content pulldown menu. You \r\ncan edit them by clicking on the \"Edit\" button that appears directly above an \r\ninstance of a particular wobject. \r\n

Almost all wobjects share some properties. Those properties are: \r\n

Wobject ID
This is the unique identifier WebGUI uses to keep track \r\nof this wobject instance. Normal users should never need to be concerned with \r\nthe Wobject ID, but some advanced users may need to know it for things like SQL \r\nReports. \r\n

Title The title of the wobject. This is typically displayed at the top \r\nof each wobject. \r\n

Note: You should always specify a title even if you are going to turn \r\nit off (with the next property). This is because the title shows up in the trash \r\nand clipboard and you\'ll want to be able to distinguish which wobject is which. \r\n

Display title?
Do you wish to display the title you specified? On \r\nsome sites, displaying the title is not necessary. \r\n

Process macros?
Do you wish to process macros in the content of \r\nthis wobject? Sometimes you\'ll want to do this, but more often than not you\'ll \r\nwant to say \"no\" to this question. By disabling the processing of macros on the \r\nwobjects that don\'t use them, you\'ll speed up your web server slightly. \r\n

Template Position
Template positions range from 0 (zero) to any \r\nnumber. How many are available depends upon the Template associated with this \r\npage. The default template has only one template position, others may have more. \r\nBy selecting a template position, you\'re specifying where this wobject should be \r\nplaced within the template. \r\n

Start Date
On what date should this wobject become visible? Before \r\nthis date, the wobject will only be displayed to Content Managers. \r\n

End Date
On what date should this wobject become invisible? After \r\nthis date, the wobject will only be displayed to Content Managers. \r\n

Description
A content area in which you can place as much content \r\nas you wish. For instance, even before an FAQ there is usually a paragraph \r\ndescribing what is contained in the FAQ.

',1048549578,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (626,'WebGUI',12,'Wobjects (fomerly known as Widgets) are the true power of WebGUI. Wobjects are \r\ntiny pluggable applications built to run under WebGUI. Message boards and polls \r\nare examples of wobjects. \r\n

To add a wobject to a page, first go to that page, then select Add \r\nContent... from the upper left corner of your screen. Each wobject has it\'s \r\nown help so be sure to read the help if you\'re not sure how to use it. \r\n

Style Sheets: All wobjects have a style-sheet class and id attached to \r\nthem. \r\n

The style-sheet class is the word \"wobject\" plus the type of wobject it is. \r\nSo for a poll the class would be \"wobjectPoll\". The class pertains to all \r\nwobjects of that type in the system. \r\n

The style-sheet id is the word \"wobjectId\" plus the Wobject Id for that \r\nwobject instance. So if you had an Article with a Wobject Id of 94, then the id \r\nwould be \"wobjectId94\".

',1048549525,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (624,'WebGUI',12,'WebGUI macros are used to create dynamic content within otherwise static \r\ncontent. For instance, you may wish to show which user is logged in on every \r\npage, or you may wish to have a dynamically built menu or crumb trail. \r\n

Macros always begin with a carat (^) and follow with at least one other \r\ncharacter and ended with a semicolon (;). Some macros can be extended/configured \r\nby taking the format of ^x(\"config text\");. \r\n

NOTE: The following macros are reserved for system/wobject-specific functions \r\nas in the SQL Report wobject and the Body in the Style Manager: \r\n^-;,^0;,^1;,^2;,^3;, etc.

',1048549469,NULL); @@ -11231,18 +11231,18 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (61,'SyndicatedContent',12,'Syndicated Innhold, INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'SiteMap',12,'This is the list of template variables available for site map templates. \r\n

page_loop
This loop contains all of the pages in the site map. \r\n

page.indent
The indent spacer for this page indicating the \r\ndepth of the page in the tree. \r\n

page.url
The URL to the page. \r\n

page.id
The unique identifier for this page that WebGUI uses \r\ninternally. \r\n

page.title
The title of this page. \r\n

page.menutitle
The title of this page that appears in navigation. \r\n

page.synopsis
The description of the contents of this page (if \r\nany). \r\n

page.isRoot
A condition indicating whether or not this page is a \r\nroot. \r\n

page.isTop
A condition indicating whether or not this page is at \r\nthe top of the navigation tree.

',1048548476,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'MessageBoard',12,'

Meldinger, også kalt Forum eller Diskusjonsgrupper, er en super måte å slippe \r\ntil et brukermiljø til en WEB-side eller intranet. Mange firma bruker meldinger \r\nintert for sammarbeid om prosjekter.

\r\n

Meldinger pr. Side?
When a visitor first comes to a \r\nmessage board s/he will be presented with a listing of all the topics (a.k.a. \r\nthreads) of the Message Board. If a board is popular, it will quickly have many \r\ntopics. The Messages Per Page attribute allows you to specify how many topics \r\nshould be shown on one page.
 
Hoved \r\nTemplate
Select a layout for the main listing of this message board. \r\n

\r\n

Filtrer Innlegg
Velg nivået av innholdsfiltrering som du \r\nønsker å utføre på alle innlegg.

\r\n

Hvem kan Lage?
Select the group that is allowed to post \r\nto this discussion.

\r\n

Rediger Timeout
How long should a user be able to \r\nedit their post before editing is locked to them?

\r\n

Note: Don\'t set this limit too high. One of the great things \r\nabout discussions is that they are an accurate record of who said what. If you \r\nallow editing for a long time, then a user has a chance to go back and change \r\nhis/her mind a long time after the original statement was made.

\r\n

Karma Pr Melding
How much karma should be given to a user \r\nwhen they post to this discussion?

\r\n

Hvem kan sensurere?
Select the group that is allowed to \r\nmoderate this discussion.

\r\n

Sensur type?
You can select what type of moderation you\'d \r\nlike for your users. På etterskudd means that when a user posts a \r\nmessage it is displayed publically right away. Påforhånd means that a \r\nmoderator must preview and approve users posts before allowing them to be \r\npublically visible. Alerts for new posts will automatically show up in the \r\nmoderator\'s WebGUI Inbox.

\r\n

Note: In both types of moderation the moderator can always \r\nedit or delete the messages posted by your users.

\r\n

Legg til endre \"stempel\" til innlegg?
Vil du \"merke\" alle \r\nendringer slik at du kan holde oversikt over hvem som endret et innlegg og når \r\ndet skjedde?

',1048548362,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (61,'MessageBoard',12,'Meldinger, Ny/Endre',1048548067,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'Article',12,'

Artikler er som en \"Swiss Armey knife\" i WebGUI. De fleste ting med statisk \r\ninnhold kan legges ved hjelp av Artikkel

\r\n

Template
Velg en template for utseende av artikkelen. \r\n

\r\n

Bilde
Velg et bilde (.jpg,.gif,.png) fil fra din \r\nharddisk. Denne vil lastes opp til serveren og vist i artikkelen.

\r\n

Vedlegg
Om du ønsker å legge ved en tekstbehandlingsfil, \r\nen zip fil, eller en hvilken som helst fil for nedlasting av dine brukere, så \r\nangi den her.

\r\n

Link Tittel
Om du ønsker en link til din artikkel, så \r\nskriv inn tittelen på linken til artikkelen i dette feltet. eksempel: Google \r\n

\r\n

Link URL
Om du la inn en link tittel, så legg inn URL\'n \r\nher. eksempel: http://www.google.com

\r\n

Konverter \"Carriage returns\"
Om du skriver HTML er det \r\nvanligvis ikke behov for denne oppsjonen. Men om du ikke skriver HTML og ønsker \r\nlinjeskift i teksten hver gang du trykker \"Enter\" da bruker du denne oppsjonen. \r\n

\r\n

Tillat Diskusjon?
Velges denne oppsjonen, vil du tillate \r\nrespons/diskusjon til artikkelen.

\r\n

Hvem kan lage respons?
Velg vilken gruppe som kan gi \r\nrespons til artikkelen.

\r\n

Kan Redigeres
Hvor lang tid en artikkel kan redigeres av \r\nbrukeren før den låses. TIPS: Ikke sett tiden for lang. En av fordelene med \r\ndiskusjoner er at de er en nøyaktig beskrivelse over hvem sa hva og når sa de \r\ndet. Om du setter tiden for lang, gir du brukeren tid til å gå tilbake og endre \r\nsin respons om han endrer mening.

\r\n

Karma pr. respons
Hvor mye karma skal gies til brukeren \r\nfor å lage en respons til denne artikkelen.

\r\n

Hvem kan godkjenne
Velg hvilken gruppe som kan \r\nredigere/godkjenne denne diskusjonen.

\r\n

Godkjenningstype
Du kan velge hvilken godkjenningstype \r\ndu vil for dine brukere. After-the-fact, betyr at responsen blir publisert \r\numiddelbart etter at den er lagret. Pre-Emptiv betyr at den må godkjennes før \r\nden blir publisert. En melding vil automatisk sendes til innboksen i WebGUI, for \r\nden brukeren som er oppført som godkjenner (redaktør). Merk: Ved begge typer vil \r\ngodkjenner ha mulighet til å redigere eller slette responsen fra brukerene.

',1048547964,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'Article',12,'

Artikler er som en \"Swiss Armey knife\" i WebGUI. De fleste ting med statisk \r\ninnhold kan legges ved hjelp av Artikkel

\r\n

VIKTIG: Du kan lage flersides artikkler ved å plassere \r\nseperator makroen (^-;) på valgfrie plasser i artikkelen.

\r\n

Template
Velg en template for utseende av artikkelen. \r\n

\r\n

Bilde
Velg et bilde (.jpg,.gif,.png) fil fra din \r\nharddisk. Denne vil lastes opp til serveren og vist i artikkelen.

\r\n

Vedlegg
Om du ønsker å legge ved en tekstbehandlingsfil, \r\nen zip fil, eller en hvilken som helst fil som skal kunne lastes ned av dine \r\nbrukere, så angi den her.

\r\n

Link Tittel
Om du ønsker en link til din artikkel, så \r\nskriv inn tittelen på linken til artikkelen i dette feltet. \r\n

eksempel: Google

\r\n

Link URL
Om du la inn en link tittel, så legg inn URL\'n \r\nher. eksempel:

http://www.google.com

\r\n

Konverter \"Carriage returns\"
Om du skriver HTML er det \r\nvanligvis ikke behov for denne oppsjonen. Men om du ikke skriver HTML og ønsker \r\nlinjeskift i teksten hver gang du trykker \"Enter\" da bruker du denne oppsjonen. \r\n

\r\n

Tillat Diskusjon?
Velges denne oppsjonen, vil du tillate \r\nrespons/diskusjon til artikkelen.

\r\n

Filtrer Bidrag
Velg vilket nivå av filtrering du ønsker å \r\nutføre på bidrag til diskusjon.

\r\n

Hvem kan lage respons?
Velg vilken gruppe som kan gi \r\nrespons til artikkelen.

\r\n

Redigering tidsgrense
Hvor lenge skal en bruker kunne \r\nredigere et innlegg før innlegget låses?

\r\n

TIPS: Ikke sett denne grensen for lang. Noe med det fine i \r\nen diskusjonsgruppe er at det er en nøyaktig logg over hva som ble sakt når av \r\nhvem. Om du tillater redigering, vil en bruker kunne gå tilbake og endre \r\nstandpunkt lenge etter at den opprinnelige uttalelsen kom.

\r\n

Karma pr. respons
Hvor mye karma skal gies til brukeren \r\nfor å lage en respons til denne artikkelen.

\r\n

Hvem kan godkjenne
Velg hvilken gruppe som kan \r\nredigere/godkjenne denne diskusjonen.

\r\n

Godkjenningstype
Du kan velge hvilken godkjenningstype \r\ndu vil for dine brukere. \"PÃ¥ etterskudd\", betyr at responsen blir publisert \r\numiddelbart etter at den er lagret. \"PÃ¥ forhÃ¥nd\" betyr at den mÃ¥ \r\ngodkjennes før den blir publisert. En melding vil automatisk sendes til \r\ninnboksen i WebGUI, for den brukeren som er oppført som godkjenner (redaktør). \r\nMerk: Ved begge typer vil godkjenner ha mulighet til Ã¥ redigere eller slette \r\nresponsen fra brukerene.

\r\n

Legg til redigerings stempel
Ønsker du å legge til et \r\nstempel som forteller hvem som redigerte og når?

',1054998041,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (896,'WebGUI',12,'Side Cache tidsavbrudd (besøkende)',1048547525,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (895,'WebGUI',12,'Side Cache tidsavbrudd',1048547487,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (893,'WebGUI',12,'Wobject Instillinger',1048547444,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (892,'WebGUI',12,'Diskusjon',1048547398,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (891,'WebGUI',12,'Only negate macros.',1048547375,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (890,'WebGUI',12,'\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n
WebGUI has a sub-system that can create tabs. You\'ll see \r\nthese in complex forms such as page editing. In order to make the tabs system \r\nlook good and match your site, you\'ll need to add a section to your style\'s \r\nstyle sheet specifically for the tabs. \r\n

The following style sheet classes are available: \r\n

.tab
The default look of each tab. \r\n

div.tabs
This also sets some properties for all of the tabs. This \r\nshould be used for the text labels in the tabs. \r\n

.tabBody
The content area for each tab. This is where the form will \r\nshow up. Note that for best results the background color of this should match \r\nthe background color of .tabActive. \r\n

.tabHover
The look of a tab as the mouse hovers over it. \r\n

.tabActive
The look of the tab that is currently visible. \r\n

Examples
You can use these instead of creating your own if you \r\nwish. Or just use these as guidelines for creating your own. \r\n

\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n
White or Light Colored Styles 
.tab {\r\n  border: 1px solid black;\r\n   background-color: #eeeeee;\r\n}\r\n.tabBody {\r\n   border: 1px solid black;\r\n   border-top: 1px solid black;\r\n   border-left: 1px solid black;\r\n   background-color: #dddddd; \r\n}\r\ndiv.tabs {\r\n    line-height: 15px;\r\n    font-size: 14px;\r\n}\r\n.tabHover {\r\n   background-color: #cccccc;\r\n}\r\n.tabActive { \r\n   background-color: #dddddd; \r\n}\r\n
Black or Dark Colored Styles 
.tab {\r\n  border: 1px solid white;\r\n   background-color: #333333;\r\n}\r\n.tabBody {\r\n   border: 1px solid white;\r\n   border-top: 1px solid white;\r\n   border-left: 1px solid white;\r\n   background-color: #444444; \r\n}\r\ndiv.tabs {\r\n    line-height: 15px;\r\n    font-size: 14px;\r\n}\r\n.tabHover {\r\n   background-color: #555555;\r\n}\r\n.tabActive { \r\n   background-color: #444444; \r\n}\r\n

',1048547340,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (11,'HttpProxy',12,'\r\n

HTTP Proxy wobject er et kraftig verktøy. Det lar deg pakke inn og vise et \r\neksternt web sted eller applikasjon på din egen side. For eksempel, om du har et \r\nWebMail system som du ønsker dine anstatte skal kunne bruke igjennom \r\nintranettet, da kan du bruke HTTP Proxy for å oppnå dette.

\r\n

URL
Start URL\'n for proxyen.

\r\n

Følge redirects?
Noen ganger er URL\'n til en side bare en \r\nlink til en ny side (Redirect). Vil du følge slike linker når de dukker opp?

\r\n

Tidsavbrudd
Tiden i sekunder som WebGUI skal vente på en \r\nforbindelse før den gir opp forsøket på å nå den eksterne siden.

\r\n

Cookie Jar
En katalogsti til hvor en skal lagre cookies \r\nsom den eksterne siden/applikasjonen produserer. Denne folderen må være en plass \r\nder Web-Serveren har rettigheter til å skrive. Om Cookies ikke blir lagret, er \r\ndet ikke sikker siden fungerer riktig.

\r\n

Fjerne Style?
Vil du fjerne style sheet fra den eksterne \r\nsiden til fordel for din egen style på din egen side?

\r\n

Filtrer innhold?
Velg nivået av HTML filtrering som du \r\nønsker å bruke på proxy innholdet.

\r\n

Tillat proxying av andre domener?
Om du proxyer en side \r\nsom Yahoo! som linker til andre domener, ønsker du da å følge disse linkene til \r\nandre domener, eller skal proxyen stoppe dem når de forsøker å forlate den \r\nopprinnelige siden du har spesifisert?

',1048547175,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (11,'HttpProxy',12,'

HTTP Proxy wobject er et kraftig verktøy. Det lar deg pakke inn og vise et \r\neksternt web sted eller applikasjon på din egen side. For eksempel, om du har et \r\nWebMail system som du ønsker dine anstatte skal kunne bruke igjennom \r\nintranettet, da kan du bruke HTTP Proxy for å oppnå dette.

\r\n

URL
Start URL\'n for proxyen.

\r\n

Følge redirects?
Noen ganger er URL\'n til en side bare en \r\nlink til en ny side (Redirect). Vil du følge slike linker når de dukker opp?

\r\n

Tidsavbrudd
Tiden i sekunder som WebGUI skal vente på en \r\nforbindelse før den gir opp forsøket på å nå den eksterne siden.

\r\n

Fjerne Style?
Vil du fjerne style sheet fra den eksterne \r\nsiden til fordel for din egen style på din egen side?

\r\n

Filtrer innhold?
Velg nivået av HTML filtrering som du \r\nønsker å bruke på proxy innholdet.

\r\n

Tillat proxying av andre domener?
Om du proxyer en side \r\nsom Yahoo! som linker til andre domener, ønsker du da å følge disse linkene til \r\nandre domener, eller skal proxyen stoppe dem når de forsøker å forlate den \r\nopprinnelige siden du har spesifisert?

',1055000647,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (889,'WebGUI',12,'Style Sheets, Tabs',1048546242,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'SyndicatedContent',12,'
The following are the template variables available to the \r\nSyndicated Content template. \r\n

channel.title
The title of this piece of syndicated content. \r\n

channel.description
A description of the content available through \r\nthis channel. \r\n

channel.link
A URL back to the originating site of this channel. \r\n

item_loop
A loop containing the data from this channel. \r\n

title
The title of a piece of content. \r\n

description
The description of the content. \r\n

link A URL directly to the original content.

',1048546157,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (72,'SyndicatedContent',12,'Syndicated Content Template',1048545923,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (28,'DataForm',12,'Valgfritt for TextArea',1048545718,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (28,'DataForm',12,'Valgfritt for TextArea og HTMLarea.',1054672426,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (27,'DataForm',12,'Høyde',1048545682,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (72,'SiteMap',12,'Site Map Template',1048534928,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (61,'Article',12,'Artikkel, Ny/Rediger',1048534898,NULL); @@ -11273,23 +11273,23 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (637,'WebGUI',12,'First Name
\r\n
  • From the admin menu select \"Manage packages.\" \r\n
  • Add a page and give it a name. The name of the page will be the name of the \r\npackage. \r\n
  • Go to the new page you created and start adding pages and wobjects. Any \r\npages or wobjects you add will be created each time this package is deployed. \r\n
    • Notes:
    In order to add, edit, or delete packages you must be \r\nin the Package Mangers group or in the Admins group.

    If you add content \r\nto any of the wobjects, that content will automatically be copied when the \r\npackage is deployed.

    Privileges and styles assigned to pages in the \r\npackage will not be copied when the package is deployed. Instead the pages will \r\ntake the privileges and styles of the area to which they are deployed. ',1046115325,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (635,'WebGUI',12,'Packages are groups of pages and wobjects that are predefined to be deployed \r\ntogether. A package manager may see the need to create a package several pages \r\nwith a message board, an FAQ, and a Poll because that task is performed quite \r\noften. Packages are often defined to lessen the burden of repetitive tasks. \r\n

    One package that many people create is a Page/Article package. It is \r\noften the case that you want to add a page with an article on it for content. \r\nInstead of going through the steps of creating a page, going to the page, and \r\nthen adding an article to the page, you may wish to simply create a package to \r\ndo those steps all at once.',1046115283,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (630,'WebGUI',12,'WebGUI has a small, but sturdy real-time search engine built-in. If you wish to \r\nuse the internal search engine, you can use the ^?; macro, or by adding \r\n?op=search to the end of any URL, or feel free to build your own form to \r\naccess it. \r\n

    Many people need a search engine to index their WebGUI site, plus many \r\nothers. Or they have more advanced needs than what WebGUI\'s search engine \r\nallows. In those cases we recommend MnoGo Search or ht://Dig.

    ',1046115123,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (629,'WebGUI',12,'Prevent Proxy Caching
    Some companies have proxy servers that \r\ncause problems with WebGUI. If you\'re experiencing problems with WebGUI, and you \r\nhave a proxy server, you may want to set this setting to Yes. Beware that \r\nWebGUI\'s URLs will not be as user-friendly after this feature is turned on. \r\n

    Show debugging?
    Show debugging information in WebGUI\'s output. This \r\nis primarily useful for WebGUI developers, but can also be interesting for \r\nAdministrators trying to troubleshoot a problem. \r\n

    Track page statistics?
    WebGUI can track some statistical \r\ninformation for your site. However, this will add a little extra strain on your \r\nprocessor and will make your database grow much more quickly. Enable this only \r\nif you do not have an external web statistics program.

    ',1046115079,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (629,'WebGUI',12,'Bruk Delt UtklippsTavle?
    Enabler en enkelt systemomfattende \r\nutklippstavle delt av alle brukerene. Standard er utklippstavle for hver enkelt \r\nbruker.
    \r\n

    Bruke Delt Søppel?
    Enabler en enkelt systemdekkende \r\nsøppel delt av alle brukere. Standard er søppel for hver enkelt \r\nbruker.

    If proxied, use real client IP address?
    If enabled and \r\nif the environment variable HTTP_X_FORWARDED_FOR is present, it\'s value will be \r\nused in place of REMOTE_ADDRESS as the client browser\'s IP address. This is \r\nrequired for IP based groups to function properly in reverse-proxied, \r\nload-balanced system architectures. In these environments, all requests would \r\notherwise appear to come from the same host, namely the proxy server. If you are \r\nuncertain if you need this setting enabled, you should probably leave it turned \r\noff.

    \r\n

    Forhindre Proxy Caching
    Noen selskaper har proxy servere som skaper \r\nproblemer for WebGUI. Om du opplever problemer med WebGUI, og du har en proxy \r\nserver, prøv å sette denne til \"Ja\". Vær klar over at WebGUI sine URL\'r ikke \r\nblir like brukervennlige etterpå.

    Vis debugging?
    Vis debugging \r\ninformasjon i resultatene fra WebGUI. Dette er først og fremst nyttig for WebGUI \r\nutviklere, men kan også brukes av administratorer som prøver å løse et \r\nproblem.

    \r\n

    Følg Side statistikker?
    WebGUI kan ta vare på en del \r\nstatistikker på bruken av nettstedet ditt. Men dette vil påvirke ytelsen på \r\nserveren og databasen vil vokse raskere. Bruk denne bare om du ikke har et \r\nekstern Web statistikk program.

    ',1055004869,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (625,'WebGUI',12,'Upload any images that you\'ll possibly use in more than one location on your \r\nsite. \r\n

    Name
    The label that this image will be referenced by to include it \r\ninto pages. \r\n

    Organize In Folder
    Which collateral folder should this image be \r\nplaced in. \r\n

    File
    Select a file from your local drive to upload to the server. \r\n

    Parameters
    Add any HTML <img&rt; parameters that you wish to \r\nact as the defaults for this image. \r\n

    Example:
    align=\"right\"
    alt=\"This is an image\"
    \r\n

    Thumbnail Size
    How big (in pixels) should the thumbnail for this \r\nimage be?

    ',1046114987,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (623,'WebGUI',12,'

    \r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n
    Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) are a great way to manage \r\nthe look and feel of any web site. They are used extensively in WebGUI. \r\n

    If you are unfamiliar with how to use CSS, Plain Black \r\nSoftware provides training classes on XHTML and CSS. Alternatively, \r\nBradsoft makes an excellent CSS editor called Top \r\nStyle. \r\n

    The following is a list of classes used to control the look of WebGUI: \r\n

    A
    The links throughout the style. \r\n

    BODY
    The default setup of all pages within a style. \r\n

    H1
    The headers on every page. \r\n

    .accountOptions
    The links that appear under the login and account \r\nupdate forms. \r\n

    .adminBar
    The bar that appears at the top of the page when you\'re \r\nin admin mode. \r\n

    .content
    The main content area on all pages of the style. \r\n

    .formDescription
    The tags on all forms next to the form elements. \r\n

    .formSubtext
    The tags below some form elements. \r\n

    .highlight
    Denotes a highlighted item, such as which message you \r\nare viewing within a list. \r\n

    .horizontalMenu
    The horizontal menu (if you use a horizontal menu \r\nmacro). \r\n

    .pagination
    The Previous and Next links on pages with pagination. \r\n

    .selectedMenuItem
    Use this class to highlight the current page in \r\nany of the menu macros. \r\n

    .tableData
    The data rows on things like message boards and user \r\ncontributions. \r\n

    .tableHeader
    The headings of columns on things like message boards \r\nand user contributions. \r\n

    .tableMenu
    The menu on things like message boards and user \r\nsubmissions. \r\n

    .verticalMenu
    The vertical menu (if you use a vertical menu \r\nmacro). \r\n

    Note: Some wobjects and macros have their own unique styles \r\nsheet classes, which are documented in their individual help files. \r\n

    ',1046114857,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (622,'WebGUI',12,'

    See Manage Group for a description of grouping functions and the default \r\ngroups.

    Gruppe Navn
    A name for the group. It is best \r\nif the name is descriptive so you know what it is at a glance.

    \r\n

    Beskrivelse
    A longer description of the group so that \r\nother admins and content managers (or you if you forget) will know what the \r\npurpose of this group is.

    \r\n

    Utløper etter
    The amount of time that a user will belong \r\nto this group before s/he is expired (or removed) from it. This is very useful \r\nfor membership sites where users have certain privileges for a specific period \r\nof time. Note that this can be overridden on a per-user basis.

    \r\n

    Karma Terskelverdi
    If you\'ve enabled Karma, then you\'ll \r\nbe able to set this value. Karma Threshold is the amount of karma a user must \r\nhave to be considered part of this group.

    ',1046114764,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (622,'WebGUI',12,'See Manage Group for a description of grouping functions and the default \r\ngroups. \r\n

    Group Name
    A name for the group. It is best if the name is \r\ndescriptive so you know what it is at a glance. \r\n

    Description
    A longer description of the group so that other admins \r\nand content managers (or you if you forget) will know what the purpose of this \r\ngroup is. \r\n

    Expire Offset
    The amount of time that a user will belong to this \r\ngroup before s/he is expired (or removed) from it. This is very useful for \r\nmembership sites where users have certain privileges for a specific period of \r\ntime. \r\n

    NOTE: This can be overridden on a per-user basis. \r\n

    Notify user about expiration?
    Set this value to yes if you want \r\nWebGUI to contact the user when they are about to be expired from the group. \r\n

    Expire Notification Offset
    The difference in the number of days \r\nfrom the expiration to the notification. You may set this to any valid integer. \r\nFor instance, set this to \"0\" if you wish the notification to be sent on the \r\nsame day that the grouping expires. Set it to \"-7\" if you want the notification \r\nto go out 7 days before the grouping expires. Set it to \"7\" if you wish \r\nthe notification to be sent 7 days after the expiration. \r\n

    Expire Notification Message
    Type the message you wish to be sent to \r\nthe user telling them about the expiration. \r\n

    Delete Offset
    The difference in the number of days from the \r\nexpiration to the grouping being deleted from the system. You may set this to \r\nany valid integer. For instance, set this to \"0\" if you wish the grouping to be \r\ndeleted on the same day that the grouping expires. Set it to \"-7\" if you want \r\nthe grouping to be deleted 7 days before the grouping expires. Set it to \r\n\"7\" if you wish the grouping to be deleted 7 days after the expiration. \r\n

    IP Address
    Specify an IP address or an IP mask to match. If the \r\nuser\'s IP address matches, they\'ll automatically be included in this group. An \r\nIP mask is simply the IP address minus an octet or two. You may also specify \r\nmultiple IP masks separated by semicolons. \r\n

    IP Mask Example: 10.;192.168.;101.42.200.142 \r\n

    Karma Threshold
    If you\'ve enabled Karma, then you\'ll be able to set \r\nthis value. Karma Threshold is the amount of karma a user must have to be \r\nconsidered part of this group. \r\n

    Users can add themselves?
    Do you wish to let users add themselves \r\nto this group? See the GroupAdd macro for more info. \r\n

    Users can remove themselves?
    Do you wish to let users remove \r\nthemselves from this group? See the GroupDelete macro for more info.

    ',1055004188,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (621,'WebGUI',12,'

    Styles are WebGUI macro enabled. See Using Macros for more information. \r\n

    Style Name
    A unique name to describe what this style \r\nlooks like at a glance. The name has no effect on the actual look of the style. \r\n

    \r\n

    Body
    The body is quite literally the HTML body of your \r\nsite. It defines how the page navigation will be laid out and many other things \r\nlike logo, copyright, etc. At bare minimum a body must consist of a few things, \r\nthe ^AdminBar; macro and the ^-; (seperator) macro. The ^AdminBar; macro tells \r\nWebGUI where to display admin functions. The ^-; (splitter) macro tells WebGUI \r\nwhere to put the content of your page.

    \r\n

    If you are in need of assistance for creating a look for your site, or if you \r\nneed help cutting apart your design, Plain \r\nBlack Software provides support services for a small fee.

    \r\n

    Many people will add WebGUI macros to their body for automated navigation, \r\nand other features.

    \r\n

    Style Sheet
    Place your style sheet entries here. Style \r\nsheets are used to control colors, sizes, and other properties of the elements \r\non your site. See Using Style Sheets for more information.

    \r\n

    Advanced Users: for greater performance create your \r\nstylesheet on the file system (call it something like webgui.css) and add an \r\nentry like this to this area:

    ',1046114675,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (619,'WebGUI',12,'This function permanently deletes the selected wobject from a page. If you are \r\nunsure whether you wish to delete this content you may be better served to cut \r\nthe content to the clipboard until you are certain you wish to delete it. \r\n

    As with any delete operation, you are prompted to be sure you wish to \r\nproceed with the delete. If you answer yes, the delete will proceed and there is \r\nno recovery possible. If you answer no you\'ll be returned to the prior \r\nscreen.
    ',1046114536,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (618,'WebGUI',12,'

    SMTP Server
    This is the address of your local mail \r\nserver. It is needed for all features that use the Internet email system (such \r\nas password recovery).

    \r\n

    Optionally, if you are running a sendmail server on the same machine as \r\nWebGUI, you can also specify a path to your sendmail executable. On most Linux \r\nsystems this can be found at \"/usr/lib/sendmail\".

    \r\n

    Email Footer
    This footer will be processed for macros and \r\nattached to every email sent from this WebGUI instance.

    Alert on new \r\nuser?
    Should someone be alerted when a new user registers anonymously? \r\n

    \r\n

    Group To Alert On New User
    What group should be alerted when a new \r\nuser registers?

    ',1046114473,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (617,'WebGUI',12,'

    Settings are items that allow you to adjust WebGUI to your particular needs. \r\n

    Rediger Firma Informasjon
    Information specific about the company or \r\nindividual who controls this installation of WebGUI.

    \r\n

    Rediger Innholds Instillinger
    Settings related to content and content \r\nmanagement.

    \r\n

    Rediger ePost Instillinger
    Settings concerning email and related \r\nfunctions.

    \r\n

    Rediger Forskjellige Instillinger
    Anything we couldn\'t find a place for. \r\n

    \r\n

    Rediger Profil Instillinger
    Define what user profiles look like and what \r\nthe users have the ability to edit.

    \r\n

    Rediger Bruker Instillinger
    Settings relating to users (beyond profile \r\ninformation), like authentication information, and registration options. \r\n

    ',1046114265,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (616,'WebGUI',12,'

    Sti til WebGUI Extras
    The web-path to the directory \r\ncontaining WebGUI images and javascript files.

    \r\n

    Maksimum vedleggs størrelse
    The maximum size of files \r\nallowed to be uploaded to this site. This applies to all wobjects that allow \r\nuploaded files and images (like Article and User Contributions). This size is \r\nmeasured in kilobytes.

    \r\n

    Tittebilde størrelse
    The size of the longest side of \r\nthumbnails. The thumbnail generation maintains the aspect ratio of the image. \r\nTherefore, if this value is set to 100, and you have an image that\'s 400 pixels \r\nwide and 200 pixels tall, the thumbnail will be 100 pixels wide and 50 pixels \r\ntall.
    Note: Thumbnails are automatically generated as images are uploaded to \r\nthe system.

    \r\n

    Web vedleggs sti
    The web-path of the directory where attachments are to be \r\nstored.

    \r\n

    Server vedleggs sti
    The local path of the directory where attachments are \r\nto be stored. (Perhaps /var/www/public/uploads) Be sure that the web server has \r\nthe rights to write to that directory.

    ',1046114149,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (615,'WebGUI',12,'

    Groups are used to subdivide privileges and responsibilities within the \r\nWebGUI system. For instance, you may be building a site for a classroom \r\nsituation. In that case you might set up a different group for each class that \r\nyou teach. You would then apply those groups to the pages that are designed for \r\neach class.
    There are several groups built into WebGUI. They are as follows: \r\n

    \r\n

    Admins
    Admins are users who have unlimited privileges \r\nwithin WebGUI. A user should only be added to the admin group if they oversee \r\nthe system. Usually only one to three people will be added to this group.

    \r\n

    Content Managers
    Content managers are users who have \r\nprivileges to add, edit, and delete content from various areas on the site. The \r\ncontent managers group should not be used to control individual content areas \r\nwithin the site, but to determine whether a user can edit content at all. You \r\nshould set up additional groups to separate content areas on the site.

    \r\n

    Everyone
    Everyone is a magic group in that no one is ever \r\nphysically inserted into it, but yet all members of the site are part of it. If \r\nyou want to open up your site to both visitors and registered users, use this \r\ngroup to do it.

    \r\n

    Package Managers
    Users that have privileges to add, edit, \r\nand delete packages of wobjects and pages to deploy.

    \r\n

    Registered Users
    When users are added to the system they \r\nare put into the registered users group. A user should only be removed from this \r\ngroup if their account is deleted or if you wish to punish a troublemaker.

    \r\n

    Style Managers
    Users that have privileges to edit styles \r\nfor this site. These privileges do not allow the user to assign privileges to a \r\npage, just define them to be used.

    \r\n

    Template Managers
    Users that have privileges to edit \r\ntemplates for this site.

    \r\n

    Visitors
    Visitors are users who are not logged in using \r\nan account on the system. Also, if you wish to punish a registered user you \r\ncould remove him/her from the Registered Users group and insert him/her into the \r\nVisitors group.

    ',1046114032,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (614,'WebGUI',12,'

    Styles are used to manage the look and feel of your WebGUI pages. With \r\nWebGUI, you can have an unlimited number of styles, so your site can take on as \r\nmany looks as you like. You could have some pages that look like your company\'s \r\nbrochure, and some pages that look like Yahoo!®. You could even have some pages \r\nthat look like pages in a book. Using style management, you have ultimate \r\ncontrol over all your designs.
    There are several styles built into WebGUI. \r\nThe first of these are used by WebGUI can should not be edited or deleted. The \r\nlast few are simply example styles and may be edited or deleted as you please. \r\n

    \r\n

    Clipboard
    This style is used by the clipboard system. \r\n

    \r\n

    Fail Safe
    When you delete a style that is still in use on \r\nsome pages, the Fail Safe style will be applied to those pages. This style has a \r\nwhite background and simple navigation.

    \r\n

    Make Page Printable
    This style is used if you place an \r\n^r; macro on your pages and the user clicks on it. This style allows you to put \r\na simple logo and copyright message on your printable pages.

    \r\n

    Packages
    This style is used by the package management \r\nsystem.

    \r\n

    Trach
    This style is used by the trash system.

    \r\n

     

    \r\n

    --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Demo \r\nStyle
    This is a sample design taken from a templates site (www.freewebtemplates.com). \r\n

    Plain Black Software (black) & (white)
    These \r\ndesigns are used on the Plain Black site.

    \r\n

    Yahoo!®
    This is the design of the Yahoo!® site. (Used \r\nwithout permission.)

    \r\n

    WebGUI
    This is a simple design featuring WebGUI logos. \r\n

    \r\n

    WebGUI 4
    This style was added to WebGUI as of version \r\n4.0.0. It is now the default style and has superceded the \"WebGUI\" style

    ',1046113935,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (614,'WebGUI',12,'

    Stiler brukes for å håndtere utseende på dine WebGUI sider. Med WebGUI kan du \r\nopprette et ubegrenset antall Stiler, slik at ditt nettsted kan ha så mange \r\nutseender som du ønsker. Du kan ha noen sider som ligner din firmabrosjyre og \r\nnoen sider som ligner Yahoo. Du kan tilogmed ha noen sider som ser ut som sider \r\ni en bok. Ved hjelp av \"Håndtere Stiler\" vil du ha ubegrenset kontroll over \r\ndesignet på nettstedet.

    \r\n

    Det finnes flere Stiler innebygget i WebGUI. De første av disse benyttes av \r\nWebGUI og bør ikke slettes eller endres.

    \r\n

    Clipboard
    Denne Stilen benyttes av Utklippstavlen.

    Fail \r\nSafe
    Når du sletter en Stil som fremdeles benyttes på en side eller \r\nflere, vil Fail Safe Stilen benyttes på disse sidene. Denne siden har hvit \r\nbakgrunn og enkel navigasjon.

    Make Page Printable
    Denne Stilen \r\nbrukes når ^r; makroen brukes på en side og brukeren klikker på den. Dene Stilen \r\nlar deg legge til en enkel logo og opphavsrett beskjed på dine utskriftbare \r\nsider.

    \r\n

     

    \r\n

    Packages
    Denne stilen benyttes av pakke håndterings \r\nsystemet.

    Trash
    Denne stilen benyttes av Søppel \r\nsystemet.

    ',1055004074,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (612,'WebGUI',12,'There is no need to ever actually delete a user. If you are concerned with \r\nlocking out a user, then simply change their password. If you truely wish to \r\ndelete a user, then please keep in mind that there are consequences. If you \r\ndelete a user any content that they added to the site via wobjects (like message \r\nboards and user contributions) will remain on the site. However, if another user \r\ntries to visit the deleted user\'s profile they will get an error message. Also \r\nif the user ever is welcomed back to the site, there is no way to give him/her \r\naccess to his/her old content items except by re-adding the user to the users \r\ntable manually.

    As with any delete operation, you are prompted to be \r\nsure you wish to proceed with the delete. If you answer yes, the delete will \r\nproceed and there is no recovery possible. If you answer no you\'ll be returned \r\nto the prior screen.
    ',1046113773,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (611,'WebGUI',12,'

    Firma Navn
    The name of your company. It will appear on \r\nall emails and anywhere you use the Company Name macro.

    \r\n

    Firma ePost Adresse
    A general email address at your \r\ncompany. This is the address that all automated messages will come from. It can \r\nalso be used via the WebGUI macro system.

    \r\n

    Firma URL
    The primary URL of your company. This will \r\nappear on all automated emails sent from the WebGUI system. It is also available \r\nvia the WebGUI macro system.

    ',1046113726,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (610,'WebGUI',12,'

    See Manage Users for additional details. \r\n
    Username
    Username is a unique identifier for a user. \r\nSometimes called a handle, it is also how the user will be known on the site. \r\n(Note: Administrators have unlimited power in the WebGUI system. This also means \r\nthey are capable of breaking the system. If you rename or create a user, be \r\ncareful not to use a username already in existance.)

    \r\n

    Password
    A password is used to ensure that the user is \r\nwho s/he says s/he is.

    \r\n

    Authentication Method
    See Edit Settings for details.

    \r\n

    LDAP URL
    See Edit Settings for details.

    \r\n

    Connect DN
    The Connect DN is the cn (or common name) of a \r\ngiven user in your LDAP database. It should be specified as cn=John Doe. This \r\nis, in effect, the username that will be used to authenticate this user against \r\nyour LDAP server.

    ',1046113641,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (608,'WebGUI',12,'\r\n

    Å slette en side kan føre til mye rot om du er usikker på hva du gjør. Når du \r\nsletter en side, sletter du samtidig alt innhold, alle undersider koblet til \r\ndenne siden og alt innhold på de. Vær helt sikker på at du har flyttet innhold \r\ndu ønsker å beholde før du sletter en side.

    \r\n

    Som med alle slette kommandoer, vil du bli spurt om du ønsker å bekrefte \r\nsletting. Om du svarer Ja, vil slettingen bli utført og dette er permanent. Om \r\ndu svarer Nei vil du returnere til forige skjermbilde.

    ',1046113587,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (607,'WebGUI',12,'

    Anonymous Registration
    Do you wish visitors to your site \r\nto be able to register themselves?

    \r\n

    Run On Registration
    If there is a command line specified \r\nhere, it will be executed each time a user registers anonymously. \r\n

    Alert on new user?
    Should someone be alerted when a \r\nnew user registers anonymously?

    \r\n

    Group To Alert On New User
    What group should be alerted \r\nwhen a new user registers?

    \r\n

    Enable Karma?
    Should karma be enabled?

    \r\n

    Karma Per Login
    The amount of karma a user should be \r\ngiven when they log in. This only takes affect if karma is enabled.

    \r\n

    Session Timeout
    The amount of time that a user session \r\nremains active (before needing to log in again). This timeout is reset each time \r\na user views a page. Therefore if you set the timeout for 8 hours, a user would \r\nhave to log in again if s/he hadn\'t visited the site for 8 hours.

    \r\n

    Authentication Method (default)
    What should the default \r\nauthentication method be for new accounts that are created? The two available \r\noptions are WebGUI and LDAP. WebGUI authentication means that the users will \r\nauthenticate against the username and password stored in the WebGUI database. \r\nLDAP authentication means that users will authenticate against an external LDAP \r\nserver.

    \r\n

    Note: Authentication settings can be customized on a per user basis.

    \r\n

    Username Binding
    Bind the WebGUI username to the LDAP \r\nIdentity. This requires the user to have the same username in WebGUI as they \r\nspecified during the Anonymous Registration process. It also means that they \r\nwon\'t be able to change their username later. This only in effect if the user is \r\nauthenticating against LDAP.

    \r\n

    LDAP URL (default)
    The default url to your LDAP server. \r\nThe LDAP URL takes the form of ldap://[server]:[port]/[base DN]. \r\nExample: ldap://ldap.mycompany.com:389/o=MyCompany. \r\n

    \r\n

    LDAP Identity
    The LDAP Identity is the unique identifier \r\nin the LDAP server that the user will be identified against. Often this field is \r\nshortname, which takes the form of first initial + last name. Example: jdoe. \r\nTherefore if you specify the LDAP identity to be shortname then Jon Doe would \r\nenter jdoe during the registration process.

    \r\n

    LDAP Identity Name
    The label used to describe the LDAP \r\nIdentity to the user. For instance, some companies use an LDAP server for their \r\nproxy server users to authenticate against. In the documentation or training \r\nalready provided to their users, the LDAP identity is known as their Web \r\nUsername. So you could enter that label here for consitency.

    \r\n

    LDAP Password Name
    Just as the LDAP Identity Name is a \r\nlabel, so is the LDAP Password Name. Use this label as you would LDAP Identity \r\nName.

    ',1046113549,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (606,'WebGUI',12,'\r\n
    Tenk på Sider som bokser for innhold. For eksempel. Om du vil \r\nskrive et brev til redaktøren av ditt favoritt magasin, da ville du tr frem \r\ntekstbehandleren og begynne å skrive inn dine tanker. Det samme er riktig for \r\nWebGUI. Lag en side og deretter fyller du den med innhold.
    \r\n

    Tittel
    The title of the page is what \r\nyour users will use to navigate through the site. Titles should be descriptive, \r\nbut not very long.
    \r\n

    Meny Tittel
    A shorter or altered title \r\nto appear in navigation. If left blank this will default to Title.
    \r\n
     
    \r\n
    Side URL
    When you create a page a URL for \r\nthe page is generated based on the page title. If you are unhappy with the URL \r\nthat was chosen, you can change it here.
    \r\n
     
    \r\n
    Språk
    Choose the default language for this \r\npage. All WebGUI generated messages will appear in that language and the \r\ncharacter set will be changed to the character set for that language.
    \r\n
     
    \r\n
    Redirect URL
    When this page is visited, the \r\nuser will be redirected to the URL specified here. In order to edit this page in \r\nthe future, you\'ll have to access it from the \"Manage page tree.\" menu under \r\n\"Administrative functions...\"
    \r\n

    Template
    By default, WebGUI has one big \r\ncontent area to place wobjects. However, by specifying a template other than the \r\ndefault you can sub-divide the content area into several sections.
    \r\n

    Kort beskrivelse
    A short description of \r\na page. It is used to populate default descriptive meta tags as well as to \r\nprovide descriptions on Site Maps.
    \r\n
     
    \r\n
    Meta Tags
    Meta tags are used by some search \r\nengines to associate key words to a particular page. There is a great site \r\ncalled Meta Tag Builder that will help you build meta tags if you\'ve never done \r\nit before.
    \r\n
    Advanced Users: If you have other things (like \r\nJavaScript) you usually put in the area of your pages, you may put them here as \r\nwell.
    \r\n
     
    \r\n
    Bruk Standard meta tags?
    If you don\'t \r\nwish to specify meta tags yourself, WebGUI can generate meta tags based on the \r\npage title and your company\'s name. Check this box to enable the \r\nWebGUI-generated meta tags.
    \r\n

    Style
    By default, when you create a \r\npage, it inherits a few traits from its parent. One of those traits is style. \r\nChoose from the list of styles if you would like to change the appearance of \r\nthis page. See Add Style for more details.
    \r\n
    If you select \"Yes\" below the style pull-down menu, all of the \r\npages below this page will take on the style you\'ve chosen for this page.
    \r\n

    Start Dato
    The date when users may begin \r\nviewing this page. Note that before this date only content managers with the \r\nrights to edit this page will see it.
    \r\n

    Slutt Dato
    The date when users will stop \r\nviewing this page. Note that after this date only content managers with the \r\nrights to edit this page will see it.
    \r\n
     
    \r\n
    Eier
    The owner of a page is usually the \r\nperson who created the page.
    \r\n
     
    \r\n
    Eier kan Se?
    Can the owner view the page or \r\nnot?
    \r\n

    Eier kan Redigere?
    Can the owner edit \r\nthe page or not? Be careful, if you decide that the owner cannot edit the page \r\nand you do not belong to the page group, then you\'ll lose the ability to edit \r\nthis page.
    \r\n

    Gruppe
    A group is assigned to every page \r\nfor additional privilege control. Pick a group from the pull-down menu.
    \r\n
     
    \r\n
    Gruppe kan Se?
    Can members of this group \r\nview this page?
    \r\n

    Gruppe kan Redigere?
    Can members of this \r\ngroup edit this page?
    \r\n

    Alle kan Se?
    Can any visitor or member \r\nregardless of the group and owner view this page?
    \r\n
     
    \r\n
    Alle kan Redigere?
    Can any visitor or member \r\nregardless of the group and owner edit this page?
    \r\n
    You can optionally recursively give these privileges to all \r\npages under this page.
    \r\n

    Hva Nå?
    If you leave this on the default \r\nsetting you\'ll be redirected to the new page after creating it.
    ',1046113437,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (606,'WebGUI',12,'
    Tenk på Sider som bokser for innhold. For eksempel. Om du vil \r\nskrive et brev til redaktøren av ditt favoritt magasin, da ville du tr frem \r\ntekstbehandleren og begynne å skrive inn dine tanker. Det samme er riktig for \r\nWebGUI. Lag en side og deretter fyller du den med innhold.
    \r\n

    Tittel
    Tittelen til siden er hva \r\nbrukerene dine vil bruke for å navigere igjennom nettstedet. Den bør være \r\nbeskrivende men ikke for lang.
    \r\n

    Meny Tittel
    En kortere eller endret tittel for bruk i navigasjon. \r\nOm den utelates vil den settes lik Tittel.
    \r\n

    SIDE URL
    Når du oppretter en side vil en URL bli generert \r\nbasert på sidens tittel. Om du ikke liker den URL som blir valgt, kan du endre \r\nden her.

    Redirect URL
    Når denne siden besøkes vil brukeren \r\nsendes til denne URL\'n.

    NOTE:     Når du er i Admin mode vil du ikke \r\nbli sendt videre. Dette er for at det skal være mulig å endre på egenskaper til \r\nsiden.

    \r\n

    Skjul fra Navigasjon?
    Velg \"ja\" om du vil skjule denne siden fra \r\nnavigasjon (Menyer)

    \r\n

    NOTE: Dette vil ikke skjule siden fra navigasjon i side treet \r\n(administrative funksjoner > HÃ¥ndtere sideTre) bare fra navigasjons \r\nmakroer.

    \r\n

    Ã…pne i nytt vindu?
    Velg \"ja\" for å opne denne siden i et nytt \r\nvindu. Dette blir ofte brukt sammen med Redirect URL \r\nparameteren.

    Språk
    Velg standard språk for denne \r\nsiden. Alle beskjeder generert av WebGUI vil da vises i i dette språket og \r\nkaraktersettet vil endres til det som er spesifisert for språket.

    \r\n

    Template
    Som standard har WebGUI et stort ommråde der innhold \r\nplasseres. Men, om du spesifiserer en template ulik standardvalget, så kan du \r\ndele siden inn i flere seksjoner.

    \r\n

    Beskrivelse (Synopsis)
    En kort beskrivelse av siden. Den brukes som \r\ngrunnlag for standard Meta Tags og som beskrivelse i nettstedets sideTre \r\nkart.

    Meta Tags
    Meta Tags blir brukt av en del søkemotorer for \r\nÃ¥ assosiere nøkkelord til spesielle sider. Det finnes et flott nettsted kalt Meta Tag \r\nBuilder  som vil hjelpe deg med Ã¥ bygge Meta Tags om du ikke har \r\ngjort det før.\r\n

    Avanserte bruker: Om du har andre ting (som JavaScript) som du \r\nvanligvis legger inn på siden din, så kan du like gjerne legge de her.\r\n

    Bruke standard Meta Tags?
    Om du ikke ønsker Ã¥ spesifisere \r\nMeta Tags selv, kan WebGUI generere meta tags basert pÃ¥ sidens tittel, ditt \r\nfirma navn. Kryss denne boksen om du vil benytte WebGUI genererte meta \r\ntags.


    Stil
    Når du oppretter en side vil den som standard, \r\narve en del egenskaper fra siden over. En av disse er stil. Velg fra listen over \r\nStiler om du vil endre utseende på siden. Se Legg til Stiler for mer \r\ninformasjon.

    Om du velger \"Ja\" under listeboksen for Stiler, sÃ¥ vill alle \r\nsider under denne bli tildelt Stilen du valgte for denne siden.

    \r\n

    Start Dato
    Datoen hvor brukere kan begynne Ã¥ se denne siden. Før \r\ndenne datoen er det bare innholds administratorer med rettighet til Ã¥ redigere \r\nden, som kan se siden.

    Slutt Dato
    Datoen da brukerene \r\nikke vil kunne se siden lenger. Etter denne datoen er det bare innholds \r\nadministratorer med rettighet til Ã¥ redigere den, som kan se siden.
    \r\n

    Eier
    Eieren av siden er vanligvis den personen som opprettet siden. \r\nDenne brukeren vil alltid ha fulle redigering og visnings rettigheter til \r\nsiden.

    NOTE:     Eier kan kun endres av Administrator.

    \r\n

    Hvem kan se på?
    Velg en gruppe som kan se på denne siden. Om du \r\nønsker at både gjester og registrerte brukere skal kunne se denne siden, da bør \r\ndu velge gruppen \"Everybody\" (alle).

    \r\n

    Hvem kan redigere?
    Velg gruppen som kan redigere denne siden. En \r\ngruppe som er tildelt redigeringsrettigheter kan alltid Se på Siden også.
    Du \r\nkan også som en oppsjon gi rettigheter til alle sider under denne siden også.\r\n

    Hva nå?
    Om du lar denne stå på standardvalg vil du gå til den nye \r\nsiden etter at den blir opprettet.

    ',1055003446,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (422,'WebGUI',12,'

    INNLOGGING FEILET

    \r\n

    Oppgitt informasjon stemmer ikke med kontoinformasjonen.

    ',1046111325,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (417,'WebGUI',12,'

    SIKKERHETS BRUDD

    \r\n

    Du prøvde å få tilgang til et Wobject som ikke tilhører denne siden. Denne \r\nhendelsen er rapportert.

    ',1046111279,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (416,'WebGUI',12,'\r\n

    PROBLEM MED FORESPØRSEL

    \r\n

    Vi har fåtte et problem med forespørselen din. Prøv å bruke Tilbake knappen \r\nog prøv igjen. Om problemet fortsetter, ta gjerne kontakt med oss med hva du \r\nønsket å gjøre samt dato og tidspunkt når problemet oppsto.

    ',1046111232,NULL); @@ -11305,11 +11305,11 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (45,'Product',12,'\r\n

    Tilbeh INSERT INTO international VALUES (43,'Product',12,'

    Spesifikasjoner er de tekniske detaljene for produktet.

    \r\n

    Label
    Typen av spesifikasjon. F.eks Høyde, bredde, vekt \r\neller farge. Du kan velge en du har laget for et annet produkt, eller legge inn \r\nen ny spesifikasjon.

    \r\n

    Spesifikasjon
    Verdien av spesifikasjonen. F.eks, om du \r\nvelger høyde som Label, da kan du legge inn en verdi som \"18\"

    \r\n

    Enhet
    Enheten for å måle denne spesifikasjonen. F.eks. om \r\ndu velger høyde som Label, vil kanskje enheten være \"cm\"

    \r\n

    Legg til en ny Spesifikasjon?
    Om du ønsker å legge til en \r\nny spesifikasjon så velg \"Ja\".

    ',1046040748,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (41,'Product',12,'

    Egenskaper er salgsargumenter for produktet. F.eks. argumenter for å kjøpe \r\nditt produkt. Egenskaper resulterer ofte i fordeler, så kankje du vil legge til \r\nnoen fordeler til dette produktet.

    \r\n

    Egenskap
    Du kan legge til en ny egenskap eller velge en \r\nsom er lagt til et annet produkt.

    \r\n

    Legg til en ny egenskap?
    Om du ønsker å legge til en ny \r\nEgenskap så velger du \"Ja\"

    ',1046040683,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (39,'Product',12,'

    WebGUI har et produkt management system bygget inn som setter deg i stand til \r\nå publisere dine produkter og tjenester til WEB siden, raskt og enkelt.

    \r\n

    Template
    Velg et utseende for publiseringen av dette \r\nproduktet.

    \r\n

    Pris
    Prisen på produktet. Du kan eventuelt skrive en \r\ntekst som \"Ring for Pris\", eller du kan la det være tomt.

    \r\n

    Produkt nummer
    Produktnummeret, varenummeret, ISBN, eller \r\nen annen identifikator.

    \r\n

    Produkt Bilde 1
    Et bilde av produktet

    \r\n

    Produkt Bilde 2
    Et bilde av produktet

    \r\n

    Produkt Bilde 3
    Et bilde av produktet

    \r\n

    Brosjyre
    Brosjyren av produktet.

    \r\n

    Manual
    Produkt, bruker eller service-manual til \r\nproduktet.

    \r\n

    Garanti
    Garantivilkår for produktet.

    ',1046040623,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'Poll',12,'\r\n

    Avstemning kan brukes for å få frem meningen til dine besøkende på \r\nforskjellige temaer.

    \r\n

    Aktiv
    If this box is checked, then users will be able to \r\nvote. Otherwise they\'ll only be able to see the results of the poll.

    \r\n

    Hvem kan stemme?
    Choose a group that can vote on this \r\nPoll.

    \r\n

    Karma Pr Stemme
    How much karma should be given to a user \r\nwhen they vote?

    \r\n

    Graf Bredde
    The width of the poll results graph. The \r\nwidth is measured in pixels.

    \r\n

    Spørsmål
    What is the question you\'d like to ask your \r\nusers?

    \r\n

    Svar
    Enter the possible answers to your question. Enter \r\nonly one answer per line. Polls are only capable of 20 possible answers.

    \r\n

    Tilfeldig rekkefølge på svar?
    In order to be sure that \r\nthe ordering of the answers in the poll does not bias your users, it is often \r\nhelpful to present the options in a random order each time they are shown. \r\nSelect \"yes\" to randomize the answers on the poll.

    \r\n

    Tilbakestill Stemmer.
    Reset the votes on this Poll.

    \r\n

    --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Note: \r\nThe following style sheet entries are custom to the Poll wobject:

    \r\n

    .pollAnswer
    An answer on a poll. \r\n

    .pollColor
    The color of the percentage bar on a \r\npoll.

    \r\n

    .pollQuestion
    The question on a poll.

    ',1046040541,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'Poll',12,'

    Avstemning kan brukes for å få frem meningen til dine besøkende på \r\nforskjellige temaer.

    \r\n

    Aktiv
    Om denne boksen er avkrysset, vil brukeren kunne \r\nstemme, eller vil de bare kunne se resultater.

    Hvem kan \r\nstemme?
    Velg en gruppe som kan stemme i avtemningen.

    \r\n

    Karma Pr Stemme
    Hvor mye Karma vil du gi til brukeren om \r\nhan stemmer?

    \r\n

    Graf Bredde
    Bredden på grafen som viser resultatene. \r\nOppgies i pixels.

    Spørsmål
    Hva er spørsmålet du vil \r\nstille brukerene?

    \r\n

    Svar
    Legg inn de mulige svarene til spørsmålet. Kun et \r\nsvar pr. linje. Avstemninger kan maksimalt ha 20 mulige svar.

    \r\n

    Tilfeldig rekkefølge på svar?
    For å være sikker på at \r\nikke rekkefølgen på svaralternativene missleder brukeren, kan du angi at svarene \r\nskal presenteres i vilkårlig rekkefølge. Velg \"ja\" for tillfeldig \r\nrekkefølge.

    \r\n

    Tilbakestill Stemmer.
    Reset the votes on this Poll.

    ',1055001263,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (74,'MessageBoard',12,'\r\n

     

    \r\n

    De følgende er en liste over Template variabler som er tilgjengelige i \r\nMeldings Templates.

    canPost
    A conditional indicating \r\nwhether the current user has the privileges to post a new message.

    \r\n

    post.url
    The URL to post a new message.

    \r\n

    post.label
    The translated label for the post URL.

    \r\n

    search.url
    The URL to search this message board.

    \r\n

    search.label
    The translated label for the search URL. \r\n

    \r\n

    subject.label
    The translated label for the subject \r\ncolumn.

    \r\n

    user.label
    The translated label for the user column.

    \r\n

    date.label
    The translated label for the date column.

    \r\n

    views.label
    The translated label for the views column. \r\n

    \r\n

    replies.label
    The translated label for the replies \r\ncolumn.

    \r\n

    last.label
    The translated label for the last reply \r\ncolumn.

    \r\n

    message_loop
    The loop containing each message.

    \r\n

    last.url
    The URL to the last reply to this message. \r\n
    last.subject
    The subject on the last reply to this message.

    \r\n

    last.username
    The username who posted the last reply to \r\nthis message.

    \r\n

    last.userProfile
    The URL to the profile of the user who \r\nposted the last reply to this message.

    \r\n

    last.date
    The date that the last reply to this message \r\nwas posted.

    \r\n

    message.subject
    The subject of this message.

    \r\n

    message.date
    The date that this message was posted.

    \r\n

    message.user
    The user that posted this message.

    \r\n

    message.views
    The views that this message has received. \r\n

    \r\n

    message.replies
    The number of replies to this thread. \r\n

    \r\n

    message.url
    The URL to view this message.

    \r\n

    message.currentUser
    A condition indicating whether the \r\ncurrent user is also the user that posted this message.

    \r\n

    message.status
    The status of this message (pending, \r\napproved, denied).

    \r\n


    firstPage
    A link to the first page in the paginator. \r\n

    \r\n

    lastPage
    A link to the last page in the paginator.

    \r\n

    nextPage
    A link to the next page forward in the \r\npaginator.

    \r\n

    previousPage
    A link to the next page backward in the \r\npaginator.

    \r\n

    pageList
    A list of links to all the pages in the \r\npaginator.

    \r\n

    multiplePages
    A conditional indicating whether there is \r\nmore than one page in the paginator.

    ',1046040410,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (72,'DataForm',12,'\r\n

    You may add as many additional fields to your Mail Form as you like.

    \r\n

    Felt Navn
    Navnet må være unikt blant navnet på felter i \r\ndette skjemaet.

    Status
    Skjulte felt vil ikke være \r\nsynelige for brukeren, men vil sendes sammen med ePosten.
    Synlige felt vil \r\nvære synlige, men vil ikke kunne redigeres.
    Redigerbare felt kan endres av \r\nbruker.
    Om du velger skjult eller synlig, så oppgi en \r\nstandardverdi(Viktig)

    \r\n

    Type
    Velg skjemaelement for dette feltet. Du kan velge \r\nmellom:
    URL: En tekstboks som vil automormatere URL\'r som skrives \r\ninn.
    Tekstboks: Standard tekstboks
    Dato: En tekstboks med en popup for \r\nvalg av dato.
    Ja/Nei: Et sett av Ja/Nei valg knapper
    ePost-Adresse: En \r\ntekstboks som kreve inntasting av en gyldig ePost adresse.
    TekstOmråde: Et \r\nenkelt ommråde for inntasting av tekst.
    Avkryssningsboks: En enkel \r\navkryssningsboks.
    Rullegardin boks: En Rullegardinboks. Bruk Mulige Verdier \r\nfeltet for å angi valgene som denne boksen skal vise. Skriv et valg pr. \r\nlinje.

    Mulige Verdier
    Dette feltet er bare brukt i \r\nrullegardin boks typen. Bruk Mulige Verdier feltet for å angi valgene som denne \r\nboksen skal vise. Skriv et valg pr. linje.

    Standard Valg \r\n(Valgfritt)
    Skriv inn standardverdi (om noen) for dette feltet. For \r\nJa/Nei, Skriv Ja, for å velge \"Ja\" og \"Nei\" for å velge \"Nei\". For \r\navkryssningsboks felter skriv \"Checked\" for å markere boksen.

    \r\n

    Fortsett til Legg Til Flere Felter?
    La denne bokse være \r\navkrysset om du ønsker å legge til flere felter etter at du har lagt til \r\ndette.

    ',1046039774,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'DataForm',12,'\r\n

    This wobject creates a simple form that will email an email address when it \r\nis filled out.

    \r\n

    Bredde
    The width of all fields in the form. The default \r\nvalue is 45.

    Fra, Til, Cc, Bcc, Emne 
    These \r\nfields control how the email will look when sent, and who it is sent to. You can \r\ngive your site visitors the ability to modify some or all of these fields, but \r\ntypically the only fields you will want the user to be able to modify \r\nare Fra and Emne. Use the drop-down options by each field to choose whether \r\nor not the user can see or modify that field.

    \r\n

    You may also choose to enter a WebGUI username or group in the To field, and \r\nthe email will be sent to the corresponding user or group.

    \r\n

    Bekreftelse
    This message will be displayed to the user \r\nafter they click \"Send\".

    \r\n

    Lagre sendte?
    If set to yes, when your mail form is \r\nsubmitted the entries will be saved to the database for later viewing. The tool \r\nto view these entries is not yet available, but when it is you will be able to \r\nview all entries from your form in a centralized location.

    \r\n

    Fortsett tl Legg til flere felter?
    Leave this checked if \r\nyou want to add additional fields to your form directly after creating \r\nit.

    ',1046038757,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (76,'LinkList',12,'\r\n

    Her følger en liste over template variabler som er tilgjengelige i Link List \r\nTemplates.

    \r\n

    addlink.url
    URL\'n for å legge til en link i listen.

    \r\n

    addlink.label
    Den oversatte etiketten for addlink.url

    \r\n

    link_loop
    Denne loop\'en inneholder all informasjon om \r\nhver enkelt link.

    \r\n

    link.url
    URL\'n for denne linken

    \r\n

    link.name
    Teksten som linkes.

    \r\n

    link.controls
    WebGUI\'s management kontroller for denne \r\nlinken.

    \r\n

    link.newwindow
    bryter for valg av om linken skal åpnes i \r\nnytt vindu eller ikke.

    \r\n

    link.description
    Beskrivelsen av linken.

    ',1046038537,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (72,'DataForm',12,'

    Du kan legge så mange felter til ditt Data Skjema som du ønsker.

    \r\n

    Label
    Dette er en informativ tekst som lar brukeren vita \r\nhva et felt representerer

    \r\n

    Felt Navn
    Navnet må være unikt blant navnet på felter i \r\ndette skjemaet.

    \r\n

    Undertekst
    En utvidelse av Label, dette er en tekst som \r\nvises under feltet og bør inneholde informasjon om hva som bør legges inn i \r\nfeltet.

    \r\n


    Status
    Skjulte felt vil ikke være synelige for \r\nbrukeren, men vil sendes sammen med ePosten.
    Synlige felt vil være synlige, \r\nmen vil ikke kunne redigeres.
    Redigerbare felt kan endres av bruker.
    Om du \r\nvelger skjult eller synlig, så oppgi en standardverdi(Viktig)

    \r\n

    Type
    Velg skjemaelement for dette feltet. \r\n

    Bredde
    Sett antall karaktere som dette feltet skal \r\nvise i bredden

    \r\n

    Høyde
    Sett antall karaktere dette feltet skal vise i \r\nhøyden. Brukes bare på textarea og HTMLArea felttyper.

    \r\n

    Mulige Verdier
    Dette feltet er bare brukt i rullegardin \r\nboks typen. Bruk Mulige Verdier feltet for å angi valgene som denne boksen skal \r\nvise. Skriv et valg pr. linje.

    Standard Valg \r\n(Valgfritt)
    Skriv inn standardverdi (om noen) for dette feltet. For \r\nJa/Nei, Skriv Ja, for å velge \"Ja\" og \"Nei\" for å velge \"Nei\". For \r\navkryssningsboks felter skriv \"Checked\" for å markere boksen.

    ',1055000503,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'DataForm',12,'

    Dette wobject lager et enkelt multifunksjons Data Skjema.

    \r\n

    Bekreftelse
    Denne meldingen vil vises for brukeren når de \r\nhar lagt inn sine data.

    \r\n

    ePost felter?
    Om denne settes til ja, vil noen ekstra \r\nfelter legges til for å håndtere ePost. Disse feltene vil brukes til å send alle \r\ndata lagt inn i Data Skjemaet til en person etter ditt ønske.

    \r\n

    Legg Merke Til: \"Til (To)\" feltet som legges til vil \r\nakseptere en ePost adresse, et WebGUI brukernavn eller WebGUI gruppenavn.

    \r\n

    Template
    Velg Template etter eget ønske.

    \r\n

    ePost Template
    Velg en Template for data som skal sendes \r\nmed ePost.

    \r\n

    Bekreftelse Template
    Velg en template som brukes for å \r\nvise bekreftelse på innlagte data for brukeren.

    \r\n

    List Template
    Velg en Template som skal brukes for å vise \r\nlagred data i dette Data Skjemaet.

    ',1054999977,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (76,'LinkList',12,'

    Her følger en liste over template variabler som er tilgjengelige i Link List \r\nTemplates.

    \r\n

    addlink.url
    URL\'n for å legge til en link i listen.

    \r\n

    addlink.label
    Den oversatte etiketten for addlink.url

    \r\n

    canEdit
    En indikator som forteller om en bruker kan \r\nredigere linkene.

    \r\n

    link_loop
    Denne loop\'en inneholder all informasjon om \r\nhver enkelt link.

    \r\n
    \r\n

    link.url
    URL\'n for denne linken

    \r\n

    link.name
    Teksten som linkes.

    \r\n

    link.controls
    WebGUI\'s management kontroller for denne \r\nlinken.

    \r\n

    link.newwindow
    bryter for valg av om linken skal åpnes i \r\nnytt vindu eller ikke.

    \r\n

    link.description
    Beskrivelsen av linken.

    ',1055000792,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'LinkList',12,'\r\n

    Title
    Teksten som vil bli linket

    \r\n

    URL
    WEB-siten det linkes til.

    \r\n

    Åpne i nytt vindu?
    Velg ja om du ønsker at denne linken \r\nskal åpnes i et nytt vindu.

    \r\n

    Beskrivelse
    Beskriv siden du linker til. Du kan hoppe \r\nover dette om du ønsker.

    \r\n

    Hva nå?
    La stå som default om du ønsker å legge til enda \r\nen link etter denne.

    ',1046038466,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'LinkList',12,'\r\n

    Link Lists er akurat det som navnet tilsier, en liste med linker. Mange \r\nweb-sider har link lister, dette wobjectet automatiserer denne prosessen.

    \r\n

    Template
    Velg en layout for dette Wobjectet.

    \r\n

    Hva nå?
    La denne stå til default om du ønsker å legge til \r\nen lik etter at link listen er laget.

    ',1046038395,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (74,'Item',12,'\r\n

    De følgende er en liste over Template variabler som kan benyttes i en Item \r\nTempate.
    attachment.name
    The filename for the file attached to this item. \r\n

    \r\n

    attachment.url
    The URL to download the file attached to \r\nthis item.

    \r\n

    attachment.icon
    The URL to the icon for the file attached \r\nto this item.

    ',1046038340,NULL); @@ -11320,12 +11320,12 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'FileManager',12,'\r\n

    FilBehandleren er INSERT INTO international VALUES (77,'FAQ',12,'\r\n

    De følgende er en liste over Template Variabler som er tilgjengelige i FAQ \r\nTemplates.

    addquestion.url
    The URL to add a question \r\nto the FAQ.

    \r\n

    addquestion.label
    The translated label for the add \r\nquestion link.

    \r\n

    qa_loop
    The loop containing the variables for each \r\nquestion in the FAQ.

    \r\n

    qa.id
    The unique identifier for this question. \r\n

    qa.answer
    The answer for this question.

    \r\n

    qa.question
    The question itself.

    \r\n

    qa.controls
    The WebGUI management controls for this \r\nquestion

    ',1046017610,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'FAQ',12,'\r\n

    Spørsmål
    Legg til spørsmålet du vil skal dukke opp i \r\nFAQ.

    \r\n

    Svar
    Legg til svaret på spørsmålet du la inn over.

    \r\n

    Hva nå?
    Om du ønsker å legge inn et spørsmål til, da lar \r\ndu denne stå på standardvalget.

    ',1046016737,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'FAQ',12,'\r\n

    Det virker som om alle WEB steder, intranett eller ekstranett i verden har en \r\negen Frequently Asked Questions seksjon. Dette wobjectet hjelper deg med å lage \r\net.

    \r\n

    Template
    Velg et utseende på denne FAQ.

    \r\n

    Hva Nå?
    Velg \"Legg Til Spørsmål\" om du ønsker å legge til \r\net nytt spørsmål etter dette.

    \r\n

    VIKTIG: Den følgende style er spesifikk til FAQ i en del av \r\nde innebyggede Templatene.

    \r\n

    .faqQuestion
    Et FAQ spørsmål. For å skille det fra et \r\nsvar.

    ',1046016671,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'ExtraColumn',12,'\r\n

    Ekstra kolonner lar deg endre utseende på KUN en side. Om du ønsker å benytte \r\nflere kolonner på alle sider, bør du kanskje vurdere å endre \"style\" som hører \r\ntil sidene dine eller velge en Template i steden for en ekstra kolonne. WebGUI \r\nlegger opp til at denne forsvinner som valg etterhvert.

    \r\n

    Kolonner er alltid lagt til fra venstre mot høyre. Eksisterende innhold på \r\nsiden vil derfor havne på venstre side av den nye kolonnen.

    \r\n

    Spacer
    Spacer er denekstra avstanden mellom ditt \r\neksisterende innhold og den nye kolonnen. Den måles i pixels.

    \r\n

    Bredde
    Bredde er den faktiske bredden av kolonnen som \r\nlegges til. Den måles i pixels.

    \r\n

    StyleSheet Class
    Som standard vil \"content\" style (som er \r\nden style som benyttes på alt innhold \"body\" som siten din benytter) bli \r\nbenyttet til alle kolonner. Men om du har laget en egen style spesielt for \r\nkolonner, så benytt gjerne den.

    ',1046016585,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'ExtraColumn',12,'

    Ekstra kolonner lar deg endre utseende på KUN en side. Om du ønsker å benytte \r\nflere kolonner på alle sider, bør du kanskje vurdere å endre \"Stil\" som hører \r\ntil sidene dine eller velge en Template i steden for en ekstra kolonne. WebGUI \r\nlegger opp til at denne forsvinner som valg etterhvert.

    \r\n

    Kolonner er alltid lagt til fra venstre mot høyre. Eksisterende innhold på \r\nsiden vil derfor havne på venstre side av den nye kolonnen.

    \r\n

    Spacer
    Spacer er den ekstra avstanden mellom ditt \r\neksisterende innhold og den nye kolonnen. Den måles i pixels.

    \r\n

    Bredde
    Bredde er den faktiske bredden av kolonnen som \r\nlegges til. Den måles i pixels.

    \r\n

    StilArk Class
    Som standard vil \"content\" stil (som er \r\nden stil som benyttes på alt innhold \"body\" som siten din benytter) bli \r\nbenyttet til alle kolonner. Men om du har laget en egen stil spesielt for \r\nkolonner, så benytt gjerne den.

    ',1054673922,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (97,'EventsCalendar',12,'\r\n

    De følgende er en liste over Template variabler som kan benyttes i Event \r\nTemplates.

    \r\n

    title
    The title of this event.

    \r\n

    start.label
    The translated label for the start date.

    \r\n

    start.date
    The date this event starts.

    \r\n

    end.date
    The date this event ends.

    \r\n

    end.label
    The translated label for the end date.

    \r\n

    canEdit
    A condition indicating whether the current user \r\ncan edit an event.

    \r\n

    edit.url
    The URL to edit this event.

    \r\n

    edit.label
    The translated label for the edit URL.

    \r\n

    delete.url
    The URL to delete this event.

    \r\n

    delete.label
    The translated label for the delete URL. \r\n

    \r\n

    previous.url
    The URL to view the event before this one. \r\n

    \r\n

    previous.label
    The translated label for the previous URL. \r\n

    \r\n

    next.label
    The translated label for the next URL.

    \r\n

    next.url
    The URL to view the event after this one.

    \r\n

    description
    The description of this event.

    ',1046016475,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (95,'EventsCalendar',12,'\r\n

    The following template variables are available for you to customize your \r\nevents calendar.

    addevent.url
    The URL to add an \r\nevent to the calendar.

    \r\n

    addevent.label
    The translated label for the add event \r\nlink.

    \r\n

    calendar.big
    A full page calendar.

    \r\n

    calendar.small
    A small calendar showing only dates.

    \r\n

    calendar.firstPage
    A link to the first page of the \r\ncalendar pagination.

    \r\n

    calendar.lastPage
    A link to the last page of the calendar \r\npagination.

    \r\n

    calendar.nextPage
    A link to the next page forward in the \r\ncalendar pagination.

    \r\n

    calendar.previousPage
    A link to the next page backward in \r\nthe calendar pagination.

    \r\n

    calendar.pageList
    A list of links to all the pages in the \r\ncalendar pagination.

    \r\n

    calendar.multiplePages
    A conditional variable indicating \r\nwhether there is more than one page in the calendar pagination.

    \r\n

    list_loop
    A loop containing the list view of an events \r\ncalendar.

    \r\n

    list.date
    The date of this event.
    \r\n
    list.title
    The title of this event.

    \r\n

    list.description
    The description of this event.

    \r\n

    list.sameAsPrevious
    A conditional indicating whether the \r\nthis event has the same date as the last event.

    \r\n

    list.url
    The URL to the full page view of this event. \r\n

    \r\n

    list.controls
    The WebGUI management controls for this \r\nevent.

    \r\n


    list.firstPage
    A link to the first page of the \r\npagination.

    \r\n

    list.lastPage
    A link to the last page of the pagination. \r\n

    \r\n

    list.nextPage
    A link to the next page forward in the \r\npagination.

    \r\n

    list.previousPage
    A link to the next page backward in the \r\npagination.

    \r\n

    list.pageList
    A list of links to all the pages in the \r\npagination.

    \r\n

    list.multiplePages
    A conditional variable indicating \r\nwhether there is more than one page in the pagination.

    ',1046016290,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'EventsCalendar',12,'\r\n

    Tittel
    Tittelen på denne Hendelsen

    \r\n

    Beskrivelse
    Beskriver denne Hendelsen eller informasjon \r\nom hvor den foregår ....

    \r\n

    Start Dato
    På hvilken dato vil Hendelsen Starte?

    \r\n

    Slutt Dato
    På hvilken dato vil Hendelsen Slutte?

    \r\n

    Gjentaes hver
    Velg et gjentakelses intervall for \r\nHendelsen.

    \r\n

    Hva Nå?
    Velg \"Legg Til Hendelse\" om du ønsker å Legge Til \r\nen ny Hendelse, eller velg \" Gå Tilbake Til Side\".

    ',1046016111,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (71,'EventsCalendar',12,'\r\n

    Hendelse kalender er ofte benyttet på mange intranett for å holde orden på \r\ninterne datoer som gjelder hele organisasjonen. Likeså er hendelses kalendere på \r\noffentlige web-sider en flott måte å la brukerene få vite hva som er planlagte \r\nhendelser i tiden fremover.

    \r\n

    Main Template
    Choose a layout for the events calendar. \r\n

    \r\n

    Hendelse Template
    Choose a layout for the individual \r\nevents within the calendars.

    \r\n

    Start Måned
    Choose the start month for your calendar. If \r\nyou choose \"current\" the calendar will always start on the current month, \r\ntherefore it will change from month to month. If you choose \"first in the \r\ncalendar\" then it will start at whatever the earliest date in the calendar is. \r\n

    \r\n

    Slutt Måned
    Choose the end month for your calendar. If \r\nyou choose \"show X months from start\", then only X months worth of information \r\nwill ever be displayed. If you choose \"current\" then the calendar will end on \r\nthe month you are currently in. If you choose \"last in calendar\" then the \r\ncalendar will end on the last date entered into the calendar.

    \r\n

    Standard Måned
    Choose which month for this calendar to \r\nstart on when a visitor comes to the page containing the calendar.

    \r\n

    Sideskift Etter
    When using a list-style calendar, how \r\nmany events should be shown per page?

    \r\n

    Fortsett til Legg til Hendelse?
    Leave this set to yes if \r\nyou want to add events to the Events Calendar directly after creating it.

    \r\n

    Note: Events that have already happened will not be displayed on the events \r\ncalendar.

    \r\n


    --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Note: ',1046016011,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'Article',12,'

    De følgende Template variablene er tilgjengelige for artikkel templates.

    \r\n


    attachment.box
    Viser en standard WebGUI vedleggs boks \r\ninkludert ikon, filnavn og vedleggs \r\nindikator

    attachment.icon
    URL\'n til ikonet for denne \r\nvedleggstypen.

    attachment.name
    Navnet på dette \r\nvedlegget.

    attachment.url
    URL\'n for nedlasting av \r\nvedlegget.

    image.thumbnail
    URL\'n til thumbnail \r\n(minibildet) for vedlegget.

    image.url
    URL\'n til \r\nbildet.

    post.label
    Oversatt prompt for å legge \r\nkommentar til denne artikkelen.

    post.URL
    URL\'n for å \r\nlage kommentar/respons til denne \r\nartikkelen.

    replies.count
    Antall \r\nkommentarer/responser til denne \r\nartikkelen.

    replies.label
    Den oversatte teksten som \r\nviser at du kan vise kommentarene.

    replies.url
    URL\'n \r\nfor å vise kommentarene til denne artikkelen.

    ',1046015883,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'Article',12,'

    De følgende Template variablene er tilgjengelige for artikkel templates.

    \r\n

    new.template
    Artikkler har den spessielle egenskapen at \r\nde kan endre template slik at du kan tillate brukerene å vise artikkelen på den \r\nmåten de velger selv. Du gjør dette ved å lage en link med en URL som dette( \r\nbytt ut 999 med den template ID du ønsker å bruke):

    \r\n

    <a href=\"<tmpl_var new.template>999\">Read more...</a>

    \r\n

    description.full
    Den fulle beskrivelsen uten noe side brudd. For \r\nbeskrivelse med sidebrudd  (ønskes beskrivelse med sidebrudd, bruk \r\n\"description\" istedenfor) \r\n

    description.first.100words
    De første 100 ord i beskrivelsen. Ord \r\nblir definert som karakterer adskilt med mellomrom, så HTML kode og tag\'s telles \r\nsom ord.

    \r\n

    description.first.75words
    De første 75 ord i beskrivelsen. Ord \r\nblir definert som karakterer adskilt med mellomrom, sÃ¥ HTML kode og tag\'s telles \r\nsom ord.

    \r\n

    description.first.50words
    De første 50 ord i beskrivelsen. Ord blir \r\ndefinert som karakterer adskilt med mellomrom, så HTML kode og tag\'s telles som \r\nord.

    \r\n

    description.first.25words
    De første 25 ord i beskrivelsen. Ord \r\nblir definert som karakterer adskilt med mellomrom, sÃ¥ HTML kode og tag\'s telles \r\nsom ord.

    \r\n

    description.first.10words
    De første 10 ord i beskrivelsen. Ord blir \r\ndefinert som karakterer adskilt med mellomrom, så HTML kode og tag\'s telles som \r\nord.

    \r\n

    description.first.paragraph
    Det første avsnitt i beskrivelsen. \r\nFørste avsnitt defineres ved det første linjeskift funnet i teksten.

    \r\n

    description.first.2paragraphs
    De første to avsnitt i \r\nbeskrivelsen. Et avsnitt defineres ved Ã¥ telle linjeskift funnet \r\ni teksten.

    \r\n

    description.first.sentence
    Den første setning funnet i \r\nbeskrivelsen. En setning finnes ved å telle punktum i teksten.

    \r\n

    description.first.2sentences
    De første to setninger funnet i \r\nbeskrivelsen. En setning finnes ved Ã¥ telle punktum i teksten.

    \r\n

    description.first.3sentences
    De første tre setninger funnet i \r\nbeskrivelsen. En setning finnes ved Ã¥ telle punktum i teksten.

    \r\n

    description.first.4sentences
    De første fire setninger \r\nfunnet i beskrivelsen. En setning finnes ved Ã¥ telle punktum i teksten.

    \r\n


    attachment.box
    Viser en standard WebGUI vedleggs boks \r\ninkludert ikon, filnavn og vedleggs \r\nindikator

    attachment.icon
    URL\'n til ikonet for denne \r\nvedleggstypen.

    attachment.name
    Navnet på dette \r\nvedlegget.

    attachment.url
    URL\'n for nedlasting av \r\nvedlegget.

    image.thumbnail
    URL\'n til thumbnail \r\n(minibildet) for vedlegget.

    image.url
    URL\'n til \r\nbildet.

    post.label
    Oversatt prompt for å legge \r\nkommentar til denne artikkelen.

    post.URL
    URL\'n for å \r\nlage kommentar/respons til denne \r\nartikkelen.

    replies.count
    Antall \r\nkommentarer/responser til denne \r\nartikkelen.

    replies.label
    Den oversatte teksten som \r\nviser at du kan vise kommentarene.

    replies.url
    URL\'n \r\nfor å vise kommentarene til denne artikkelen.

    \r\n

    firstPage
    En link til første side i flersidesystemet \r\n

    lastPage
    En link til siste side i flersidesystemet

    \r\n

    nextPage
    En link til neste side i flersidesystemet

    \r\n

    previousPage
    En link til forrige side \r\ni flersidesystemet

    \r\n

    pageList
    En liste av linker til alle sidene i \r\nflersidesystemet

    \r\n

    multiplePages
    En indikator for om det finnes mer enn en side i \r\nflersidesystemet.

    \r\n

    isFirstPage
    En indikator på om brukeren viser den første siden.

    \r\n

    isLastPage
    En indikator pÃ¥ om brukeren viser den siste \r\nsiden.

    ',1054999322,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (888,'WebGUI',12,'Snippet forhåndsvisnings lengde',1046015056,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (886,'WebGUI',12,'Skjule fra Navigasjon?',1046014989,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (885,'WebGUI',12,'Tilate bruker å deaktivere deres konto?',1046014960,NULL); @@ -11379,7 +11379,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (818,'WebGUI',12,'Deaktivert',1045779863,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (817,'WebGUI',12,'Aktiv',1045779851,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (816,'WebGUI',12,'Status',1045779841,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (815,'WebGUI',12,'Filen du prøvde å laste opp er for stor.',1045779832,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (814,'WebGUI',12,'Tilbake til Styles.',1045779800,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (814,'WebGUI',12,'Tilbake til Stiler.',1054673724,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (812,'WebGUI',12,'Din melding er sendt.',1045779786,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (811,'WebGUI',12,'Fra',1045779766,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (810,'WebGUI',12,'Send',1045779758,NULL); @@ -11405,8 +11405,8 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (790,'WebGUI/Profile',12,'Slett denne profilkat INSERT INTO international VALUES (789,'WebGUI/Profile',12,'Rediger denne profil kategorien.',1045778739,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (788,'WebGUI/Profile',12,'Slett dette profil feltet.',1045778721,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (787,'WebGUI/Profile',12,'Rediger dette profil feltet.',1045778706,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (786,'WebGUI',12,'WebGUI\'s collateral håndteringssystem lar deg laste opp bilder og tekst til en sentral plassering for bruk andre plasser i ditt inhold.',1045778682,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (785,'WebGUI',12,'Collateral, Håndtere',1045778608,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (786,'WebGUI',12,'WebGUI\'s collateral hÃ¥ndteringssystem lar deg laste opp bilder og tekst til en sentral plassering for bruk andre plasser i ditt innhold.',1054673065,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (785,'WebGUI',12,'Collateral, HÃ¥ndtere',1054672943,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (784,'WebGUI',12,'Tittebilde',1045778591,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (783,'WebGUI',12,'Skriv',1045778581,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (781,'WebGUI',12,'Snippet',1045778527,NULL); @@ -11414,7 +11414,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (780,'WebGUI',12,'Fil',1045778518,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (779,'WebGUI',12,'Bilde',1045778510,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (778,'WebGUI',12,'Mappe Beskrivelse',1045778502,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (776,'WebGUI',12,'Rediger en Mappe',1045778491,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (775,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker på at du vil slette denne Mappen og flytte alt innholdet til mappen over?',1045778480,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (775,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker pÃ¥ at du vil slette denne Mappen! Den kan ikke hentes tilbake nÃ¥r den er slettet.',1055977693,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (774,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker på at du vil slette dette Collateral? De kan ikke hentes frem igjen når det er slettet.',1045778429,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (773,'WebGUI',12,'Fil',1045778378,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (772,'WebGUI',12,'Rediger Fil',1045778370,NULL); @@ -11475,7 +11475,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (704,'WebGUI',12,'Sekund(er)',1045675813,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (697,'WebGUI',12,'Karma, i Bruk',1045675800,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (696,'WebGUI',12,'Søppel, Tøm',1045675786,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (685,'WebGUI',12,'Template, Slette',1045675771,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (683,'WebGUI',12,'Templates, Håndtere',1045675760,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (683,'WebGUI',12,'Templates, HÃ¥ndtere',1054672762,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (682,'WebGUI',12,'Bruker Profil, Rediger',1045675700,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (681,'WebGUI',12,'Pakker, Opprett',1045675685,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (680,'WebGUI',12,'Pakker, Legg Til',1045675668,NULL); @@ -11524,7 +11524,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (767,'WebGUI',12,'Collateral ID',1045613231,NUL INSERT INTO international VALUES (813,'WebGUI',12,'Grupper i denne Gruppen',1045613214,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (804,'WebGUI',12,'Kopier denne Style',1045613184,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (66,'WebGUI',12,'Logg Inn',1045613150,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (659,'WebGUI',12,'Styles, Håndtere',1045613138,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (659,'WebGUI',12,'Stiler, HÃ¥ndtere',1054672726,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (658,'WebGUI',12,'Brukere, Håndtere',1045613124,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (657,'WebGUI',12,'Bruker, Slett',1045613107,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (656,'WebGUI',12,'Firma Informasjon, Rediger',1045613095,NULL); @@ -11534,9 +11534,9 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (653,'WebGUI',12,'Side, Slett',1045613044,NULL) INSERT INTO international VALUES (652,'WebGUI',12,'Bruker Instillinger, Rediger',1045613032,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (651,'WebGUI',12,'Om du velger å tømme søppla, vill alt innhold slettes permanent. Om du er usikker på noen enheter, kan det være lurt og klippe de til utklipstavlen før du tømmer søppelbøtta.',1045613010,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (65,'WebGUI',12,'Slett min konto permanent.',1045612905,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (642,'WebGUI',12,'Side, Legg Til/Rediger',1045612870,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (642,'WebGUI',12,'Side, Legg Til/Rediger',1054672695,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (640,'WebGUI',12,'Det er ingen god ide å slette Templates siden du aldrig er sikker på hvilken effekt det kan ha på sidene dine (kanskje noe innhold benytter Templaten).',1045612853,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (638,'WebGUI',12,'Templates are used to affect how content is laid out in WebGUI. There are many templates that come with WebGUI, and using the template management system, you can add your own templates to the system to ensure that your site looks exactly how you want it to look. ',1045612822,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (638,'WebGUI',12,'Templates brukes for Ã¥ pÃ¥virke hvordan innhold vises frem i WebGUI. Det følger med mange Templates i WebGUI. Bruker du Template hÃ¥ndteringssystemet kan du legge til dine egne Templates for Ã¥ sikre at systemet fÃ¥r et utseende nøyaktig som du ønsker det.',1054673255,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (64,'WebGUI',12,'Logg Ut.',1045612770,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (633,'WebGUI',12,'Enkelt forklart så er roots sider uten noen sider over seg. Den første og viktigste root\'n i WebGUI er \"Home\" siden. Mange vil ikke legge til flere root sider, men noen vil. Disse brukerene vil lage flere root\'s av forskjellige grunner. Kanskje de vil lage et mellomlager eller testside for redaktører. Eller kanskje en skjult side med Admin verktøy. Eller en side for registrerte bruker som er medlem av en spesiell gruppe.',1045612736,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (63,'WebGUI',12,'Slå Admin På.',1045612412,NULL); @@ -11549,7 +11549,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (609,'WebGUI',12,'N INSERT INTO international VALUES (605,'WebGUI',12,'Legg Til Grupper',1045611149,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (601,'WebGUI',12,'Internasjonal ID',1045611133,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (60,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker på at du vil dekativere kontoen din? Om du fortsetter vil din konto informasjon slettes permanent.',1045611119,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (6,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere Styles.',1045611043,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (6,'WebGUI',12,'HÃ¥ndtere Stiler.',1054673704,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (598,'WebGUI',12,'Rediger Oversettelsen.',1045611027,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (597,'WebGUI',12,'Rediger Internasjonal Melding',1045611010,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (596,'WebGUI',12,'MANGLER',1045610985,NULL); @@ -11748,7 +11748,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (430,'WebGUI',12,'Vis Siste Side',1045438748,NU INSERT INTO international VALUES (43,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker på at du vil slette dette innholdet?',1045438719,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (429,'WebGUI',12,'LoggInn Tidspunkt',1045438690,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (428,'WebGUI',12,'Bruker (ID)',1045438673,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (427,'WebGUI',12,'Styles',1045438661,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (427,'WebGUI',12,'Stiler',1054673689,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (426,'WebGUI',12,'Logginn Historikk',1045438652,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (425,'WebGUI',12,'Aktive sesjoner',1045438635,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (424,'WebGUI',12,'Vis Logginn historikk.',1045438620,NULL); @@ -11757,7 +11757,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (42,'WebGUI',12,'Bekreft',1045423601,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (412,'WebGUI',12,'Kort Beskrivelse',1045423158,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (411,'WebGUI',12,'Meny Tittel',1045423141,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (410,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere Roots.',1045423117,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (41,'WebGUI',12,'Du prøver å fjerne en viktig komponent av WebGUI systemet. Om du ble tillat å fortsette ville WebGUI kanskje slutte å fungere.',1045423102,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (41,'WebGUI',12,'Du prøver Ã¥ fjerne et nødvendig element i WebGUI systemet. Om du ble tillat Ã¥ fortsette ville WebGUI kanskje slutte Ã¥ fungere.',1054594931,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (409,'WebGUI',12,'Legg Til ny Root.',1045423020,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (408,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere Roots',1045422997,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (407,'WebGUI',12,'Klikk her for å registrere deg.',1045422984,NULL); @@ -11768,8 +11768,8 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (403,'WebGUI',12,' INSERT INTO international VALUES (402,'WebGUI',12,'Meldingen du forespurte eksisterer ikke.',1045422870,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (401,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker på at du vil slette denne Meldingen og alle meldinger under den i denne tråden?',1045422820,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (400,'WebGUI',12,'Forhindre Proxy Caching',1045422774,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (40,'WebGUI',12,'Viktig komponent',1045422743,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (4,'WebGUI',12,'Håndter Instillinger.',1045422706,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (40,'WebGUI',12,'Nødvendig Element',1054594882,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (4,'WebGUI',12,'HÃ¥ndtere Instillinger.',1055005507,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (399,'WebGUI',12,'Godkjenn denne Siden.',1045422688,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (398,'WebGUI',12,'Angi Dokumenttype',1045422668,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (395,'WebGUI',12,'Legg til nytt Bilde.',1045422626,NULL); @@ -11789,7 +11789,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (378,'WebGUI',12,'Bruker ID',1045421383,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (377,'WebGUI',12,'Ingen Pakker er definert av din pakke administrator(er)',1045421373,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (376,'WebGUI',12,'Pakke',1045421312,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (375,'WebGUI',12,'Velg Pakke å rulle ut',1045421304,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (374,'WebGUI',12,'Håndter Pakker',1045421276,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (374,'WebGUI',12,'HÃ¥ndtere Pakker',1055005460,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (372,'WebGUI',12,'Rediger Brukerens Grupper',1045421246,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (371,'WebGUI',12,'Legg Til Gruppering',1045421224,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (370,'WebGUI',12,'Rediger Gruppering',1045421210,NULL); @@ -11842,12 +11842,12 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (40,'Product',12,'Produkt Egenskap, Legg til/Re INSERT INTO international VALUES (38,'Product',12,'Produkt, Legg til/Rediger',1045348939,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (22,'Product',12,'Rediger Egenskap',1045348920,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (9,'Poll',12,'Rediger Avstemning',1045348904,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (61,'Poll',12,'Avstemning, Legg Til/Rediger',1045348889,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (7,'DataForm',12,'Rediger ePost skjema',1045348836,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (61,'Poll',12,'Avstemning, Legg Til/Rediger',1054672559,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (7,'DataForm',12,'Rediger DataSkjema',1054672497,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (6,'MessageBoard',12,'Rediger Meldinger',1045348819,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (12,'MessageBoard',12,'Rediger melding',1045348800,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (62,'DataForm',12,'ePost skjemaFelter, Legg til/Rediger',1045348779,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (61,'DataForm',12,'ePost skjema, Legg til/Rediger',1045348759,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (62,'DataForm',12,'DataSkjema Felter, Legg til/Rediger',1054672477,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (61,'DataForm',12,'DataSkjema, Legg til/Rediger',1054672449,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (20,'DataForm',12,'Rediger Felt',1045348728,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (72,'LinkList',12,'Link, Legg til/Rediger',1045348713,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (61,'LinkList',12,'Link Liste, Legg til/Rediger',1045348697,NULL); @@ -11965,7 +11965,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (160,'WebGUI',12,'Dato bidratt',1045346068,NULL INSERT INTO international VALUES (16,'WebGUI',12,'Februar',1045346021,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (159,'WebGUI',12,'Innboks',1045345725,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (158,'WebGUI',12,'Legg Til en ny Style',1045345714,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (157,'WebGUI',12,'Styles',1045345701,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (157,'WebGUI',12,'Stiler',1054673673,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (155,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker på at du vil slette denne Style og migrere alle sider som bruker den til \"den trygge\" Style?',1045345676,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (154,'WebGUI',12,'Style Sheet(Stilark)',1045345588,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (151,'WebGUI',12,'Style Navn',1045345557,NULL); @@ -11976,7 +11976,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (147,'WebGUI',12,'Sider',1045345510,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (146,'WebGUI',12,'Aktive Sessions',1045345502,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (145,'WebGUI',12,'WebGUI Build Versjon',1045345488,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (144,'WebGUI',12,'Vis Statistikk.',1045345464,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (143,'WebGUI',12,'Håndter Instillinger',1045345448,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (143,'WebGUI',12,'HÃ¥ndtere Instillinger',1055005499,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (142,'WebGUI',12,'Session Timeout',1045345431,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (141,'WebGUI',12,'Fant Ikke Siden',1045345409,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (14,'WebGUI',12,'Vis ventende Bidrag.',1045345363,NULL); @@ -12191,7 +12191,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (5,'Poll',12,'Bredde p INSERT INTO international VALUES (4,'Poll',12,'Hvem kan stemme?',1045075353,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (3,'Poll',12,'Aktiv',1045075338,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (20,'Poll',12,'Karma pr. stemme',1045075280,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (12,'Poll',12,'Totalt antall stemmer:',1045075178,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (12,'Poll',12,'Totalt antall stemmer:',1054672541,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (11,'Poll',12,'Stem!',1045075150,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (10,'Poll',12,'Tilbakestill stemmer',1045075134,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (1,'Poll',12,'Avstemning',1045075114,NULL); @@ -12215,7 +12215,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'DataForm',12,'Send',1044117930,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (5,'DataForm',12,'Synelig',1044117656,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (4,'DataForm',12,'Skjult',1044117645,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (3,'DataForm',12,'Takk for din tilbakemelding!',1044117627,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (25,'DataForm',12,'Standard Verdi (Valgfritt)',1044117557,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (25,'DataForm',12,'Standard Verdi(er)',1054672289,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (24,'DataForm',12,'Mulige Verdier (Nedtrekk-Boks)',1044117518,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (23,'DataForm',12,'Type',1044117469,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (22,'DataForm',12,'Status',1044117459,NULL); @@ -12228,9 +12228,9 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (16,'DataForm',12,'Bekreftelse',1044117303,NULL INSERT INTO international VALUES (14,'DataForm',12,'Tema',1044117217,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (13,'DataForm',12,'Bcc',1044117207,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (12,'DataForm',12,'cc',1044117197,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (11,'DataForm',12,'Til (epost, brukernavn eller gruppenavn)',1044117187,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (11,'DataForm',12,'Til',1054672237,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (10,'DataForm',12,'Fra',1044117148,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (1,'DataForm',12,'Mail Form',1044117135,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (1,'DataForm',12,'Data Skjema',1054672206,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (9,'LinkList',12,'Er du sikker du vil slette denne Linken?',1044117086,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (8,'LinkList',12,'URL',1044117043,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (75,'LinkList',12,'Link Liste Template',1044117020,NULL); @@ -12270,7 +12270,7 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (2,'FAQ',12,'F.A.Q.',1044115569,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (13,'FAQ',12,'Slå på [top]Link?',1044115556,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (12,'FAQ',12,'Slå på Q&A?',1044115516,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (11,'FAQ',12,'Slå på TOC?',1044115490,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (5,'ExtraColumn',12,'StyleSheet Class',1044115399,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (5,'ExtraColumn',12,'StilArk Class',1054673657,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (4,'ExtraColumn',12,'Bredde',1044115384,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (3,'ExtraColumn',12,'Spacer',1044115374,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (1,'ExtraColumn',12,'Ekstra kolonne',1044115356,NULL); @@ -12402,8 +12402,8 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (857,'WebGUI',21,'IP',1045486652,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (890,'WebGUI',8,'WebGUI ha un sottosistema che può creare \"tabs\". Vedrai queste tabs in form complessi come l\'editing di una pagina. Per far visualizzare bene le tabs e farle combaciare con il look del tuo sito, é necessario aggiungere una sezione al tuo style sheet specifica per le tabs.\r\n

    \r\nLe seguenti classi di style sheet sono disponibili:\r\n

    \r\n\r\n.tab
    \r\nIl look di default di ogni tab.\r\n

    \r\n\r\ndiv.tabs
    \r\nQuesto definisce alcune proprietà per tutte le tab. Dovrebbe essere usato per le etichette di testo nelle tabs.\r\n

    \r\n\r\n.tabBody
    \r\nL\'area del contenutoper ogni tab. Qui é dove il form viene visualizzato. Nota che per i migliori risultati il colore di sfondo di questo elemento deve combaciare con quello di .tabActive.\r\n

    \r\n\r\n\r\n.tabHover
    \r\nIl look di una tab quando il mouse ci passa sopra.\r\n

    \r\n\r\n.tabActive
    \r\nIl look della tab attualmente visibile.\r\n

    \r\n\r\n\r\nEsempi
    \r\nPuoi usare questi invece di creare i tuoi propri se vuoi. Oppure usa questi come linee guida per creare i tuoi propri.

    \r\n
    \r\nStili bianchi o chiari\r\n
    \r\n.tab {\r\n  border: 1px solid black;\r\n   background-color: #eeeeee;\r\n}\r\n.tabBody {\r\n   border: 1px solid black;\r\n   border-top: 1px solid black;\r\n   border-left: 1px solid black;\r\n   background-color: #dddddd; \r\n}\r\ndiv.tabs {\r\n    line-height: 15px;\r\n    font-size: 14px;\r\n}\r\n.tabHover {\r\n   background-color: #cccccc;\r\n}\r\n.tabActive { \r\n   background-color: #dddddd; \r\n}\r\n
    \r\n    		\r\nStili neri o scuri\r\n
    \r\n.tab {\r\n  border: 1px solid white;\r\n   background-color: #333333;\r\n}\r\n.tabBody {\r\n   border: 1px solid white;\r\n   border-top: 1px solid white;\r\n   border-left: 1px solid white;\r\n   background-color: #444444; \r\n}\r\ndiv.tabs {\r\n    line-height: 15px;\r\n    font-size: 14px;\r\n}\r\n.tabHover {\r\n   background-color: #555555;\r\n}\r\n.tabActive { \r\n   background-color: #444444; \r\n}\r\n\r\n
    \r\n
    ',1048856569,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'SyndicatedContent',8,'Le seguenti variabili sono disponibili nel template per il contenuto da altri siti.\r\n\r\n

    \r\n\r\nchannel.title
    \r\nIl titolo di questo pezzo di contenuto da altri siti

    \r\n\r\nchannel.description
    \r\nUna descrizionde del contenuto disponibile tramite questo canale

    \r\n\r\nchannel.link
    \r\nUna URL che punta al sito generatore di questo contenuto\r\n

    \r\n\r\nitem_loop
    \r\nUn loop contenente i dati da questo canale.\r\n

    \r\n\r\ntitle
    \r\nIl titolo di un pezzo di contenuto.\r\n

    \r\n\r\ndescription
    \r\nLa descrizione del contenuto\r\n

    \r\n\r\nlink\r\nUna URL diretta al contenuto originale\r\n

    ',1048855993,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (891,'WebGUI',8,'Annulla solo le macro',1048258281,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (896,'WebGUI',8,'Timeout della cache della pagina (visitatori)',1048258225,NULL); -INSERT INTO international VALUES (895,'WebGUI',8,'Timeout della cache della pagina',1048258204,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (896,'WebGUI',8,'Timeout della cache (visitatori)',1056804082,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (895,'WebGUI',8,'Timeout della cache',1056804058,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (889,'WebGUI',8,'Style Sheet, Tabs',1048258121,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (893,'WebGUI',8,'Proprietà del Wobject',1048067652,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (892,'WebGUI',8,'Discussione',1048067622,NULL); @@ -15006,6 +15006,171 @@ INSERT INTO international VALUES (961,'WebGUI',2,'Der Mülleimer ist eine sp INSERT INTO international VALUES (937,'WebGUI',2,'Um ein Thema zu importieren, benötigten Sie ein korrektes Themen-File, dass \r\nvon einer anderen WebGUI Seite exportiert wurde. Wählen Sie einfach die entsprechende \r\nDatei von Ihrer Festplatte un klicken Sie auf den Import-Button. Sie gelangen \r\ndanach zu einer Bestätigungsseite. Danach klicken Sie wieder auf den Import-Button \r\nund schon haben Sie Ihr neues Thema. Sie können nun anfangen, die Elemente des \r\nThemas in Ihre Seite einzubinden, so als wären es normale Styles, Templates \r\noder Upload-Elemente.

    Sei können ein Thema nur einmal importieren. Wenn Sie \r\neine neue Version eines Themas importieren möchten, müssen Sie die vorherige \r\nVersion des Themas löschen.

    Sie können kein Thema importieren von einer neueren \r\nWebGUI-Version als die auf Ihrem System installierte. Wenn Sie als mit WebGUI \r\n5.3.0 arbeiten und möchten ein Thema importieren, das mit WebGUI 6.0.0 erstellt \r\nwurde, dann können Sie dieses nicht importieren, es sei denn, Sie aktualisieren \r\nIhre WebGUI-Version.

    ',1055252364,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (932,'WebGUI',2,'

    Themen sind ein Mechanismus, um schnell neue Styles, Templates und Upload-Elemente \r\n(z. B. Grafiken) in eine WebGUI-Seite installieren zu können. Ausserdem bieten \r\nsich die Themen an, wenn man Elemente von einer WebGUI-Seite zu einer anderen \r\nverschieben möchte.

    \r\n

    TIP: Wenn Sie ein Thema erstellen, achten Sie darauf, dass Sie die \r\nElemente des Themas so benennen, dass Sie für jedes Thema einmalig sind. Dies \r\nempfiehlt sich deswegen, damit Ihre Benutzer schnell die Komponenten des Themas \r\nfinden, aber auch, damit es keine Namenskonflikte mit bereits vorhandenen Elementen \r\ngibt.

    \r\n',1055242702,NULL); INSERT INTO international VALUES (83,'DataForm',2,'\r\nNachfolgend die Template Variablen für DataForm Templates.

    acknowledgement
    Die \r\nBestätigung, die in den Wobject Eigenschaften angegeben ist. Diese Nachricht \r\nsollte dem Benutzer nach dem Absenden eines Formulars angezeigt werden.

    export.tab.url
    Das \r\nAnklicken dieser URL führt zum Exportieren der Daten, die über dieses DataForm \r\ngespeichert wurden in eine Tabulator-getrennte Datei.

    export.tab.label
    Die \r\nStandardbezeichnung für diese URL (z. B. \'Hier klicken zum Exportieren\')

    entryList.url
    Das \r\nAnklicken dieser URL zeigt eine Liste mit allen Einträgen, die mit diesem DataForm \r\ngespeichert wurden.

    entryList.label
    Die Standardbezeichnung für \r\ndiese URL.

    canEdit
    Eine Bedingungsvariable, die prüft, ob der Benutzer \r\ndie Berechtigung hat, einen vorhandenen Eintrag zu bearbeiten oder die Formular-Export \r\nFunktion zu benutzen.

    back.url
    Eine URL, die Sie auf die Standard-Seite \r\ndes Formulars führt.

    back.label
    Die Bezeichnung für diesen Link.

    username*
    Der \r\nBenutzername des Benutzers, der die Daten übermittelt hat.

    userId*
    Die \r\nBenutzerID dieses Benutzers.

    date*
    Das Datum, an dem diese Daten \r\nübermittelt bzw. zuletzt bearbeitet wurden. Die Formatierung des Datums erfolgt \r\nin dem vom Benutzer bevorzugten Datums-/Zeitformat

    epoch*
    Das Datum \r\n(siehe date) als Epoch-Datum.

    ipAddress*
    Die IP-Adresse des Benutzers, \r\nder die Daten übermittelt (das heisst, das Formular ausgefüllt) hat.. \r\n

    edit.url*
    Eine URL, um diesen Eintrag zu bearbeiten.

    error_loop*
    Eine \r\nSchleife, die Fehlerinformationen enthält, wenn z. B. ein Benutzer nicht alle \r\nbenötigten Felder ausgefüllt hat.. \r\n

    \r\n

    error.message*
    Fehlermeldung, die dem Benutzer anzeigt, \r\n dass er einen Fehler gemacht  (z.B. ein Formularfeld nicht asgefüllt) \r\n hat.

    addField.url
    Die URL, die Contentmanagern \r\ndie Möglichkeit bietet, ein Feld zum Formular hinzuzufügen.

    addField.label
    Die \r\nBezeichnung für diese URL (z. B. \'Neues Formularfeld hinzufügen\'). \r\n

    form.start
    Der Anfang des Formulars.

    field_loop
    Eine \r\nSchleife, die alle Feldinformationen enthält.

    \r\n

    field.form
    Das Form-Element für dieses Feld.

    field.name
    Der \r\n Name dieses Feldes.

    field.value
    Der Wert dieses Feldes. Bei \r\n neuen Daten wird der Default-Wert benutzt.

    field.label
    Die Bezeichung \r\n für dieses Feld.

    field.isHidden
    Eine Variable, die anzeigt, \r\n ob dieses Feld versteckt ist oder nicht.

    field.isDisplayed
    Eine \r\n Variable, die anzeigt, ob dieses Feld angezeigt werden soll oder nicht.

    field.isEditable
    Eine \r\n Variable, die anzeigt, ob dieses Feld bearbeitet (d. h. ob Eingaben gemacht \r\n werden dürfen) oder nicht.

    field.isRequired
    Eine Variable, die \r\n anzeigt, ob dieses Feld erforderlich ist oder nicht.

    field.isMailField
    Eine \r\n Variable, die anzeigt, ob das Feld nur angezeigt oder auch per Mail versandt \r\n werden soll.

    field.subtext
    Ein Zusatztext für dieses Feld (z. \r\n B. um dem Benutzer anzuzeigen, was er in dieses Feld einzugeben hat..

    field.controls
    WebGUI\'s Administrations \r\n Controls für dieses Feld. \r\n

    form.send
    Text des "Formular senden"-Buttons.

    form.save/b>
    Ein \r\nFormular-Button mit dem Wort "Save"

    form.end
    Das \r\nEnde des Formulars.

    *Nur verfügbar, sofern der Benutzer dieses Formular bereits \r\nabgeschickt hat.

    ',1055242403,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (1000,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklinks bieten einem WebGUI Administrator die Möglichkeit, Datenbankverbindungen anzulegen, die in SQL-Reports verwendet werden können. Dies befreit den Ersteller des SQL-Reports, über DSN, Benutzernamen oder Kennwörter Kenntniss zu haben.

    \r\nBeachten Sie, dass die Datenbanklinks, die Sie hier erstellen, allen Content-Managern sichtbar sind. Obwohl diese keine Möglichkeit haben, die Datenbank-Verbindungsdaten einzusehen, so haben sie dennoch die Möglichkeit, Datenbankoperationen wie Select, Show, etc. durchzuführen. Damit ist für Sie eine höhere Sicherheit gewährleistet.',1056542115,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (1002,'WebGUI',2,'Wenn Sie einen Datenbanklink löschen, werden alle SQL-Reports, die diesen Link verwenden, nicht mehr funktionieren. Eine Liste aller betroffenen SQL-Reports wird Ihnen auf der Bestätigungsseite angezeigt.

    \r\nWie bei jedem Löschvorgang, werden Sie vorher gefragt, ob Sie sich sicher sind, den Datenbanklink zu löschen. Wenn Sie dann mit \"Ja\" antworten, wird der Löschvorgang durchgeführt und ist nicht rückgängig zu machen. Wenn Sie mit \"Nein\" antworten, gelangen Sie wieder zur vorhergehenden Seite.',1056541810,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (999,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklink, Löschen',1056541616,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (998,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklink, Hinzufügen/Bearbeiten',1056541598,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (997,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklinks, Verwalten',1056541570,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (996,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklinks verwalten',1056541557,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (995,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbank Passwort',1056541543,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (994,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbank Benutzer',1056541532,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (993,'WebGUI',2,'DSN',1056541519,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (992,'WebGUI',2,'Titel',1056541511,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (991,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklink ID',1056541501,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (990,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklink bearbeiten',1056541489,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (989,'WebGUI',2,'auf Seite',1056541475,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (988,'WebGUI',2,'Sind Sie sicher, dass Sie diesen Datenbanklink löschen möchten? Die nachfolgenden Elemente, die diesen Link verwenden, funktionieren anschliessend nicht mehr.',1056541459,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (987,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklink löschen',1056541398,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (986,'WebGUI',2,'Zurück zu den Datenbanklinks.',1056541381,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (985,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklink löschen',1056541362,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (984,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklink kopieren',1056541345,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (983,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklink bearbeiten',1056541331,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (982,'WebGUI',2,'Datenbanklink hinzufügen',1056541315,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (981,'WebGUI',2,' Verwalten: Datenbanklinks',1056541266,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (980,'WebGUI',2,'Ordner leeren.',1056541163,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (979,'WebGUI',2,'Sind Sie sicher, dass Sie alle Elemente dieses Ordners löschen möchten? Diese können nicht wiederhergestellt werden. Elemente in Unterordnern werden aber nicht gelöscht.',1056541143,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (1003,'WebGUI',2,'Wobject Berechtigungen aktivieren?',1056541041,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (21,'SQLReport',2,'Wenn Sie keinen vordefinierten Datenbanklink verwenden möchten, geben Sie hier die Datenbankverbindungsdaten an.',1056540950,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (20,'SQLReport',2,'Datenbank Link',1056540900,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (19,'SQLReport',2,'Wählen Sie einen Datenbanklink...',1056540888,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (12,'HttpProxy',2,'URLs überschreiben?',1056540861,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (29,'DataForm',2,'erforderlich',1056540838,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (1001,'WebGUI',8,'

    Titolo
    \r\nUn titolo per il database link.\r\n

    DSN
    \r\nData Source Name è l\'identificatore univoco che il Perl\r\nusa per descrivere la posizione del tuo database. Prende il formato di DBI:[driver]:[database\r\nname]:[host].
    \r\n

    Esempio: DBI:mysql:WebGUI:localhost\r\n

    Qui ci sono alcuni esempi per altri database.
    \r\nOracle:\r\n

    \r\nPostgreSQL:\r\n\r\nSybase:\r\n\r\n

    Database User
    \r\nLa username che usi per connetterti al  DSN.\r\n

    Database Password
    \r\nLa password che usi per connetterti al  DSN.

    \r\n',1056804559,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (999,'WebGUI',8,'Database Link, Cancella',1056804021,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (998,'WebGUI',8,'Database Link, Aggiungi/Modifica',1056804004,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (997,'WebGUI',8,'Database Links, Gestisci',1056803889,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (996,'WebGUI',8,'Gestisci Database Links',1056803829,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (995,'WebGUI',8,'Database Password',1056803810,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (994,'WebGUI',8,'Database User',1056803795,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (993,'WebGUI',8,'DSN',1056803779,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (992,'WebGUI',8,'Titolo',1056803766,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (991,'WebGUI',8,'Database Link ID',1056803744,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (990,'WebGUI',8,'Modifica Database Link',1056803730,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (989,'WebGUI',8,'Sulla pagina',1056803707,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (988,'WebGUI',8,'Sei sicuro di voler cancellare questo database link? I seguenti elementi stanno usando questo link e non funzioneraano più se lo cancelli.',1056803683,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (987,'WebGUI',8,'Cancella Database Link',1056803582,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (986,'WebGUI',8,'Indietro ai database links.',1056803561,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (985,'WebGUI',8,'Cancella questo database link.',1056803533,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (984,'WebGUI',8,'Copia questo database link.',1056803510,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (983,'WebGUI',8,'Modifica questo database link.',1056803490,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (982,'WebGUI',8,'Aggiungi un database link.',1056803455,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (981,'WebGUI',8,'Gestisci database links.',1056803431,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (980,'WebGUI',8,'Svuota questa cartella.',1056803402,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (979,'WebGUI',8,'Sei sicuro di voler cancellare tutti gli elementi di questa cartella? Una volta cancellati non potranno essere recuperati. Gli elementi nelle sotto-cartelle non saranno rimossi.',1056803380,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (1003,'WebGUI',8,'Privilegi Wobjects?',1056803284,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (1002,'WebGUI',8,'Qunado cancelli un database link, tutti i report SQL che usano quel link cesseranno di funzionare. Una lista di tutti i Report interessati sarà mostrato nella schermata di conferma.\r\n

    \r\nCome ogni operazione di cancellazione, ti viene richiesto se sei certo di voler procedere alla eliminazione. Se rispondi SI la cancellazione sarà eseguita e non ci sarà più possibilità di ripristinare i dati. Se rispondi NO tornerai alla schermata precedente.',1056803235,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (1000,'WebGUI',8,'I Database Links consentono agli amministratori di WebGUI di aggiungere i database comunemente usati per utilizzarli con gli SQL Report. Questo permette agli autori del Report SQL di non dover conoscere o inserire DNS, utente e password.\r\n

    \r\nTieni presente che ogni Database Link che crei qui sarà disponibile a tutti gli autori di contenuti. Mentre essi non potranno vedere le informazioni di connessione al database, avranno la possibilità di eseguire ogni select, visualizzazione sul database.',1056802924,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (21,'SQLReport',8,'Se non desideri utilizzare il link al database predefinito, inserisci qui sotto le informazioni relative alla connessione al tuo database. ',1056802367,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (20,'SQLReport',8,'Database Link',1056802278,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (19,'SQLReport',8,'Scegli un link al database',1056802264,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (12,'HttpProxy',8,'Riscrivi urls?',1056802227,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (29,'DataForm',8,'Obbligatorio',1056290012,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (29,'DataForm',12,'mÃ¥ fylles ut',1055977628,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (961,'WebGUI',12,'

    Søppla er en spesiell system lokasjon hvor slettede elementer blir \r\nmidlertidig lagret. Elementer i søppla kan administreres individuelt. Du kan \r\nklippe et element til utklippstavlen eller permanent slette det ved å vlge \r\nriktig ikon. Du kan også slette/fjerne alle elementer i søppla ved å velge \"Tøm \r\nsøppla\"

    \r\n

    Tittel
    Navnet på enheten i søppla. Du kan vise elementet ved å \r\nvelge tittelen.\r\n

    Type
    Typen element i søppla. F.eks. Pakke, Artikkel eller \r\nHendelseskallender, osv..\r\n

    Søppel Dato
    Dato og tid for når elementet ble puttet i søppla.\r\n

    Forrige Lokasjon
    Lokasjonen hvor elementet var plassert før. Du kan \r\nvise lokasjonen ved å velge lokasjon.\r\n

    Brukernavn
    Brukernavnet til den brukeren som plasserte elementet i \r\nsøppla. Dette feltet er kun synelig når det er valgt delt søppel eller når en \r\nadministrator bruker søppla.

    ',1054997233,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (958,'WebGUI',12,'

    Utklippstavlen er en spesiell systemlokasjon som midlertidig inneholder \r\nelementer som er klippet ut eller kopiert. Enheter fra utklippstavlen kaan limes \r\ninn på nye lokasjoner.

    \r\n

    Utklippstavlens innhold kan administreres individuelt. Du kan slette eller \r\nlime inn enheter ved å velge riktig ikon. Du kan også flytte hele innholdet på \r\nutklippstavlen til søppla ved å velge \"Tøm utklippstavle\".\r\n

    Tittel
    Navnet på enheten på utklippstavlen. Du kan vise enheten ved \r\nå velge tittelen.

    \r\n

    Type
    Typen innhold. F.eks. En pakke, en artikkel, hendelseskalender \r\nosv.\r\n

    Utklippsdato Date
    Dato og tid når enheten ble plassert på \r\nutklippstavlen.\r\n

    Forrige lokasjon
    Lokasjonen hvor enheten sist var \r\nplassert. Du kan vise lokasjonen ved å velge lokasjonen.

    \r\n

    Brukernavn
    Brukernavnet til den brukeren som plasserte \r\nelementet på utklippstavlen. Dette feltet er bare synelig i en delt \r\nutklippstavle hvor en administrator administrerer innholdet på \r\nutklippstavlen.

    ',1054996731,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (934,'WebGUI',12,'

    Opprettelse og redigering av tema er en nokså enkel prosess. Først setter du \r\nopp noen grunnleggende egenskaper for temaet, og så legger du elementer til \r\nTema.

    \r\n

    De grunnleggende egenskapene for et tema kan ikke endres på med unntak av på \r\ndet nettstedet det ble opprettet på. Nå følger definisjon på de grunnleggende \r\negenskapene for et Tema:

    \r\n

    Theme ID
    den unike ID for dette tema på dette WebGUI nettstedet. \r\nDenne ID vil endres om Tema er importert til et nytt nettsted.

    \r\n

    Theme Name
    Dette er det unike navnet til et tema. Det må være unikt \r\npå hvert eneste nettsted det vil bli importert til. Navnet vil ikke endres på \r\nandre nettsteder.

    \r\n

    Theme Designer
    Navnet til den person eller firma som skapte dette \r\ntema.

    \r\n

    Designer URL
    URL\'n til nettstedet til skaperen av temaet. Om du \r\nønsker å reklamere for nettstedet som lager Tema for WebGUI, så er dette plassen \r\nfor å skape oppmerksomhet.

    ',1054996098,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (74,'Poll',12,'

    De følgende variablene er tilgjengelige for Avstemnings \r\n(Poll) Template:

    \r\n

     canVote
    A condition indicating whether the user has the right \r\nto vote on this poll.

    \r\n

    question
    The poll question. \r\n

    form.start
    The beginning of the vote form. \r\n

    answer_loop
    A loop containing information about the answers in the \r\npoll. \r\n

    \r\n

    answer.form
    The radio button for this answer. \r\n

    answer.text
    The text of the answer. \r\n

    answer.number
    The number of this answer. As in 1, 2, 3, etc. \r\n

    answer.graphWidth
    The width that the graph should be rendered for \r\nthis answer. Based upon a percentage of the total graph size. \r\n

    answer.percent
    The percentage of the vote that this answer has \r\nreceived. \r\n

    answer.total
    The total number of votes that this answer has \r\nreceived. \r\n

    form.submit
    The submit button for the poll form. \r\n

    form.end
    The end of the poll form. \r\n

    responses.label
    The label for the total responses. \"Total Votes\" \r\n

    responses.total
    The total number of votes that have been placed on \r\nthis poll.

    ',1054995581,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (89,'DataForm',12,'

    De Følgende variablene er tilgjengelige for Data Skjema List Template:

    \r\n

    back.url
    The URL to go back to the Data Form data entry page.

    \r\n

    back.label
    The default label for the back.url. \r\n

    field_loop
    A loop containing information about the fields in this \r\nData Form. \r\n

    field.name
    The web safe name of this field. \r\n

    field.label
    The human readable label for this field. \r\n

    field.id
    A unique identifier representing this field in the \r\ndatabase. \r\n

    field.isMailField
    A conditional indicating whether this field \r\nexists for the mail subsystem of the data form. \r\n

    field.type
    The data type associated with this field. \r\n

    \r\n

    record_loop
    A loop containing the record \r\nentries of this data form. \r\n

    \r\n

    record.entryId
    A unique identifier for this record entry. \r\n

    record.ipAddress
    The IP Address of the user that submitted this \r\nrecord entry. \r\n

    record.edit.url
    The URL to edit this record. \r\n

    record.username
    The username of the person that submitted this \r\nrecord entry. \r\n

    record.userId
    The user id of the person that submitted this record \r\nentry. \r\n

    record.submissionDate.epoch
    The epoch datestamp for this record \r\nentry. \r\n

    record.submissionDate.human
    A human readable date stamp, based upon \r\nthe user\'s preferences, for this record entry. \r\n

    record.data_loop
    A loop containing the data submitted by the user \r\nfor each field in this data form. \r\n

    \r\n

    record.data.value
    The value submitted by the user for this \r\nfield in this record entry. \r\n

    record.data.name
    The web safe name of this field. \r\n

    record.data.label
    The human readable label for this field. \r\n

    record.data.isMailField
    A conditional indicating whether this field \r\nexists for the mail subsystem of the data form.

    ',1054995491,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (83,'DataForm',12,'

    De følgende template variablene er tilgjengelige for Data Skjema \r\nTemplates.

    \r\n

    acknowledgement
    The acknowledgement specified in the wobject\'s \r\nproperties. This message should be displayed after a user submits data.

    \r\n

    export.tab.url
    Following this URL will export the data stored to \r\nthis data form as a tab delimited file. \r\n

    export.tab.label
    The default label for the export.tab.url variable. \r\n\r\n

    entryList.url
    Following this URL will display a list of all the \r\nrecord entries in this data form. \r\n

    entryList.label
    The default label for the entryList.url variable. \r\n

    canEdit A conditional indicating whether the current user has the \r\nprivileges to edit an existing entry or export the form\'s data. \r\n

    back.url
    A url that will take you back to the default page in the \r\nform. \r\n

    back.label
    The default label for the back.url variable. \r\n

    username*
    The username of the user that submitted the data. \r\n

    userId*
    The user id of the user that submitted the data. \r\n

    date*
    The date that this data was submitted or last updated \r\nformatted as the user\'s preferred date/time format. \r\n

    epoch*
    The date that this data was submitted or last updated \r\nformatted as an epoch date. \r\n

    ipAddress*
    The IP address of the user that submitted the data. \r\n

    edit.url*
    The URL to the page to edit this entry. \r\n

    error_loop*
    A loop containing error information, for instance if \r\nsomeone doesn\'t fill out a required field. \r\n

    \r\n

    error.message*
    An error message indicating what the user \r\nmight have done wrong.
    addField.url
    The URL that content \r\nmanagers will visit to add a new field to the form. \r\n

    addField.label
    The default label for the addField.url variable. \r\n

    form.start
    The beginning of the form. \r\n

    field_loop
    A loop containing all of the field information. \r\n

    \r\n

    field.form
    The form element for this field. \r\n

    field.name
    The name of this field. \r\n

    field.value
    The value of this field. If this is new data, then the \r\ndefault value will be used. \r\n

    field.label
    The text label for this field. \r\n

    field.isHidden
    A conditional indicating whether this field is \r\nsupposed to be hidden. \r\n

    field.isDisplayed
    A conditional indicating whether this field is \r\nsupposed to be displayed. \r\n

    field.isEditable
    A conditional indicating whether this field is \r\neditable. \r\n

    field.isRequired
    A conditional indicating whether this field is \r\nrequired. \r\n

    field.isMailField
    A conditional indicating whether this field is \r\npresent only to facilitate sending an email. \r\n

    field.subtext
    A description of the field so that users know what to \r\nput in the field. \r\n

    field.controls
    WebGUI\'s administrative controls for this field. \r\n

    form.send
    A form button with the word \"send\" \r\nprinted on it. \r\n

    form.save/b>
    A form button with the word \"save\" printed on it. \r\n

    form.end
    The end of the form. \r\n

    *Only available if the user has already submitted the form.

    ',1054995406,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (84,'DataForm',12,'Eksporter Tabulator separert.',1054673503,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (88,'DataForm',12,'DataSkjema Liste Template',1054673475,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (87,'DataForm',12,'Liste Template',1054673453,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (85,'DataForm',12,'En pr. linje.',1054673430,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (86,'DataForm',12,'List alle oppføringer.',1054673404,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (936,'WebGUI',12,'Tema, Importer',1054671908,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (938,'WebGUI',12,'Tema, Slett',1054671891,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (941,'WebGUI',12,'Avmerkings Liste',1054671872,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (942,'WebGUI',12,'Radioknapp Liste',1054671836,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (943,'WebGUI',12,'Avmerkingsboks',1054671655,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (944,'WebGUI',12,'Post Nummer',1054671516,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (945,'WebGUI',12,'Scratch Filter',1054671476,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (946,'WebGUI',12,'Bruke Delt Søppel?',1054671343,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (947,'WebGUI',12,'Bruke Delt Utklippstavle?',1054671325,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (948,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere utklippstavle',1054671296,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (949,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere Utklippstavle.',1054671271,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (950,'WebGUI',12,'Tøm Utklippstavle.',1054671248,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (951,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker på at du vil tømme utklippstavlen til Søppel?',1054671226,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (952,'WebGUI',12,'Utklippstavle Dato',1054671190,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (953,'WebGUI',12,'Forrige Lokasjon',1054671167,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (954,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere System Utklippstavle.',1054671145,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (955,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere System Utklippstavle',1054670910,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (957,'WebGUI',12,'Utklippstavle, Håndtere',1054670886,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (964,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere System Søppel.',1054670857,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (962,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere Søppel',1054670837,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (963,'WebGUI',12,'Søppel Dato',1054670819,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (959,'WebGUI',12,'Tøm system utklipstavlen.',1054670802,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (965,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere System Søppel',1054670774,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (956,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker på at du vil flytte denne enheten fra utklippstavlen til søppel?',1054670747,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (960,'WebGUI',12,'Søppel, Håndtere',1054670683,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (966,'WebGUI',12,'Er du helt sikker på at du vil slette denne enheten permanent fra søppla?',1054670660,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (967,'WebGUI',12,'Tøm System Søppel.',1054670581,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (940,'WebGUI',12,'Åpne i nytt vindu?',1054668766,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (939,'WebGUI',12,'Når du sletter et Tema du har laget selv, så vil du bare slette henvisningene og egenskapene for temaet. Men, når du sletter et tema som er importert, vil du også slette alle elementene. Vær derfor helt sikker på at ingen elementer er i bruk når du sletter et importert tema.',1054668746,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (937,'WebGUI',12,'For å kunne importere et tema må du ha en gyldig tema fil som er eksportert fra en annen WebGUI site. Velg bare filen fra harddisken og klikk på importer knappen. Du vil da få et godkjennings bilde som spør om det er det temaet du ønsker å importere. Om du er enig, klikk på Importer knappen igjen og du har et nytt tema tilgjengelig. Du kan da begynne å legge til elementene til sidene dine på samme måte som du normalt gjør med stiler og templates.\r\n\r\nDu kan ikke importere et tema flere ganger. Om du ønsker å importere en ny versjon av et tema, må du først slette den forrige versjonen av temaet.\r\n\r\nDu kan heller ikke importere et tema fra en versjon av WebGUI som er nyere enn den du bruker. Om du bruker WebGUI 5.2.4 og temaet var laget med WebGUI 6.0.0, da kan du ikke importere temaet før du har oppgradert.',1054668565,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (935,'WebGUI',12,'Filen du lastet opp ser ikke ut til å være en gyldig tema fil.',1054668014,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (933,'WebGUI',12,'Tema, Rediger',1054667947,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (932,'WebGUI',12,'Tema er en rask måte å installere nye stiler, Templates og Collateral til en WebGUI site. De er også effektive for å flytte de samme fra en site til en annen.\r\n\r\nTIP: Når du bygger et tema, sørg for å navngi elementene (stiler, templates, Collateral) med navn som er unike i forhold til Temaet. Dette er fornuftig slik at brukerene kan finne tilhørende elementer og for å unngå navnekonflikter med andre elementer.',1054667928,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (931,'WebGUI',12,'Temaer, Håndtere',1054667525,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (930,'WebGUI',12,'Vis Tema',1054667455,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (929,'WebGUI',12,'Importer!',1054667435,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (928,'WebGUI',12,'Ønsker du å importere dette tema?',1054667419,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (927,'WebGUI',12,'Importer Tema',1054667393,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (926,'WebGUI',12,'Dette Tema ble opprettet med en nyere versjon av WebGUI enn den som er installert på ditt system. Du må oppgradere før du kan installere dette tema.',1054595539,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (925,'WebGUI',12,'Du har allerede en versjon av dette tema installert. Du må slette dette før du kan installere det igjen.',1054595453,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (924,'WebGUI',12,'Importer et tema.',1054595395,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (923,'WebGUI',12,'Tema Versjon',1054595376,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (922,'WebGUI',12,'Opprettet med',1054595360,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (921,'WebGUI',12,'Tema SamlingsFil',1054595287,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (919,'WebGUI',12,'Rediger dette tema.',1054595225,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (918,'WebGUI',12,'Slett dette tema.',1054595206,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (915,'WebGUI',12,'Fil',1054595186,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (914,'WebGUI',12,'Bilde',1054595174,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (912,'WebGUI',12,'Style',1054595061,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (917,'WebGUI',12,'Legg element til tema.',1054595028,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (910,'WebGUI',12,'Element Type',1054595001,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (909,'WebGUI',12,'Legg til Tema element',1054594988,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (908,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikke på at du vil fjerne dette elementet fra tema?',1054594969,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (911,'WebGUI',12,'Element',1054594824,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (907,'WebGUI',12,'Er du sikker på at du vil slette dette tema?',1054594683,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (906,'WebGUI',12,'Designer URL',1054594630,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (905,'WebGUI',12,'Tema Designer',1054594613,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (904,'WebGUI',12,'Tema Navn',1054594587,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (903,'WebGUI',12,'Tema ID',1054594572,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (902,'WebGUI',12,'Rediger Tema.',1054594558,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (901,'WebGUI',12,'Legg til nytt tema.',1054594540,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (900,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere Temaer.',1054594455,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (899,'WebGUI',12,'Håndtere Temaer',1054594427,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (898,'WebGUI',12,'Site Icon',1054594391,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (897,'WebGUI',12,'Favicon',1054594369,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (920,'WebGUI',12,'Eksporter dette Tema.',1054581209,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (916,'WebGUI',12,'Snippet',1054581168,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (913,'WebGUI',12,'Template',1054581135,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (968,'WebGUI',12,'Kopitavle, Tom',1054581124,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (969,'WebGUI',12,'Om du velger å tømme kopitavlen, vil alle enheter på den bli flyttet til søppel.',1054581099,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (73,'Poll',12,'Avstemnings Template',1054581002,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (98,'EventsCalendar',12,'Nå!',1054580964,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (82,'DataForm',12,'Data Skjema Template',1054580879,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (81,'DataForm',12,'Bekreftelse Template',1054580862,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (80,'DataForm',12,'Epost Template',1054580844,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (79,'DataForm',12,'Undertekst',1054580825,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (77,'DataForm',12,'Label',1054580812,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (76,'DataForm',12,'Legg til Felt.',1054580787,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (75,'DataForm',12,'Må fylles ut!',1054580765,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (74,'DataForm',12,'Sendes på ePost?',1054580704,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (9,'Auth/LDAP',12,'Bruker RDN',1054580650,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (9,'WobjectProxy',12,'Overstyre beskrivelse?',1054580630,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (8,'WobjectProxy',12,'Overstyre visnings tittel?',1054580608,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (7,'WobjectProxy',12,'Overstyre Tittel?',1054580567,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (10,'WobjectProxy',12,'Overstyre Template?',1054580553,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (897,'WebGUI/Profile',12,'Redigerbar?',1054580517,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (978,'WebGUI',12,'Bruker lagt til OK!',1054580499,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (977,'WebGUI',12,'Er sekunder administrator?',1054580463,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (976,'WebGUI',12,'Legg til brukere',1054580419,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (975,'WebGUI',12,'Kan bruker fjerne seg selv?',1054580389,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (974,'WebGUI',12,'Kan bruker legge til seg selv?',1054580356,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (973,'WebGUI',12,'Om Proxy brukes, skal ekte klient IP-adresse brukes?',1054580314,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (972,'WebGUI',12,'Dato og Tidspunkt',1054580235,NULL); +INSERT INTO international VALUES (971,'WebGUI',12,'Klokken',1054580202,NULL); -- -- Table structure for table 'karmaLog' @@ -15560,7 +15725,7 @@ CREATE TABLE webguiVersion ( -- -INSERT INTO webguiVersion VALUES ('5.4.0','initial install',unix_timestamp()); +INSERT INTO webguiVersion VALUES ('5.4.1','initial install',unix_timestamp()); -- -- Table structure for table 'wobject' diff --git a/docs/upgrades/upgrade_5.4.1-5.5.0.sql b/docs/upgrades/upgrade_5.4.1-5.5.0.sql new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be7d4236e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/upgrades/upgrade_5.4.1-5.5.0.sql @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +insert into webguiVersion values ('5.5.0','upgrade',unix_timestamp()); + diff --git a/lib/WebGUI.pm b/lib/WebGUI.pm index 4edeb5791..56a463c6c 100644 --- a/lib/WebGUI.pm +++ b/lib/WebGUI.pm @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ package WebGUI; -our $VERSION = "5.4.1"; +our $VERSION = "5.5.0"; #------------------------------------------------------------------- # WebGUI is Copyright 2001-2003 Plain Black LLC.